Download Owner`s Manual
Transcript
Contents Owner's Manual for Vehicle A-Z The Ultimate Driving Machine® THE BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN. OWNER'S MANUAL. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐ tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or Integrated Owner's Manual are found in the appendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐ chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride. BMW AG The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app. Additional information on the Internet: www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 © 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English II/15, 03 15 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Addendum ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL We wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and clarifications will supersede the materials contained in that document. 1. Where the terms “service center,” “the service center,” “your service center,” “service specialist,” or “service” are used in the Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications. 2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual contains an affirmative instruction to contact a “service center” or “your service center,” we wanted to clarify that BMW recommends that, if you are faced with one of the situations addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a BMW dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications. While BMW of North America LLC, at no cost to you, will pay for repairs required by the limited warranties provided with respect to your vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Program during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage periods, you are free to elect, both during those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops. 3. Where the Owner's Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been approved by BMW, those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by BMW of North America LLC. You may elect to use other parts and accessories, but, if you do, we recommend that you make sure that any such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle. 4. At page 7, under the warranty section's discussion of homologation, where it states that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there,” the text should read that you “may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there.” 5. At page 7, under the “Parts and accessories” section, in the sixth sentence, the word “cannot” should read “does not.” 6. At page 54, in the “Check and replace safety belts” section, the text beginning, “This should only be done by your service center …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important that this safety feature functions properly.” 7. At page 91, under the heading: “Special windshield,” the paragraph beginning, “Therefore, have the special windshield …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends that you have the special windshield replaced by the service center.” 8. At page 168 under the heading: “Objects within the range of movement of the pedals” and at page 232 under the heading: “Carpets and floor mats,” the paragraph that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place.” 9. At page 173, under the heading: “Have maintenance carried out,” the sentence beginning, “The maintenance should be carried out …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Addendum thereof: “BMW recommends that you have the maintenance carried out by your service center.” 10. At page 189, under the heading “Tire inflation specifications,” the sentence beginning, “Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes …” should be disregarded. 11. At page 197, under the heading: “Mounting,” the paragraph beginning, “Have mounting and balancing …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends that you have mounting and balancing performed by your service center or a tire mounting specialist.” 12. At page 198, under the heading: “Approved wheels and tires,” the term “Approved” should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, the term “Recommended” should be read in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non-recommended wheels and tires to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle. 13. At page 202, under the heading: “Snow Chains,” the text should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle and are determined by the manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe and are recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle. Information about recommended snow chains is available from a service center. 14. At page 205, under the heading “Hood,” the sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar” should be disregarded. 15. At page 208, under the heading: “Engine oil change,” the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof should be read as follows: BMW recommends that you have the oil changed at your BMW dealer's service center or at another service center that has trained personnel that can perform the work in accordance with BMW specifications. 16. At page 210, under the heading: “Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models,” the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and repair performed by your BMW dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle. 17. At page 213 and page 216, where it reads: “Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlights,” that text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read: “Xenon headlight work or replacement can cause serious and fatal injuries.” In the text that follows, where it reads: “[h]ave any work on the xenon lighting system … ,” the following words should be read as preceding that passage: “It is strongly suggested that you …” 18. At page 221, under the “Battery replacement” section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Addendum Use of recommended vehicle batteries The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available. After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that any “check control” messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 242. 6 Notes At a glance 14 18 27 30 Cockpit iDrive Voice activation system Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 182 184 189 204 206 209 210 212 223 229 Refueling Fuel Wheels and tires Engine compartment Engine oil Coolant Maintenance Replacing components Breakdown assistance Care Reference Controls 34 50 60 64 77 92 97 119 124 145 152 160 Mobility Opening and closing Adjusting Transporting children safely Driving Displays Lights Safety Driving stability control systems Driving comfort Climate control Interior equipment Storage compartments 236 Technical data 242 Everything from A to Z Driving tips 166 Things to remember when driving 169 Loading 172 Saving fuel I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Notes Notes Symbols Using this Owner's Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic is by using the index. Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter. ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of information. Orientation Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment. Updates made after the editorial deadline "..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to select individual functions. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐ pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle. ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system. ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system. User's manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ munication and the short commands of the voice activation system are described in a sep‐ arate user's manual, which is also included with the onboard literature. Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for information on a particular part or assembly. Vehicle features and options Additional sources of information The service center will be happy to answer any other questions you may have. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. BMW Driver’s Guide App The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐ tries as an app. Additional information on the Internet: www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide Symbols on vehicle components This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐ scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐ able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐ mentary Owner's Handbooks. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Notes On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently from what is shown in the illustrations. Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ ately trained personnel. If work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Status of the Owner's Manual Basic information Parts and accessories The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con‐ ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle. BMW recommends using parts and accesso‐ ries approved by BMW for this purpose. Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐ pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle. For your own safety Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require‐ ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ ating conditions and permit requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐ gation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information can be obtained from your Service Centre. Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work. Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐ ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐ ucts approved by BMW and related qualified advice. BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles. BMW can assume responsibility for them. However, we cannot assume any responsibility whatsoever for parts and accessories that have not been specifically approved by BMW. BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard. This guarantee does not apply when country-specific government approval has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential oper‐ ating conditions to which components might be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's own stringent quality standards. California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ bile components and parts, including compo‐ nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 7 Notes chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ lowing warranties: ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ ures: ▷ BMW Maintenance system ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri‐ ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Data memory ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ ranty. ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. ▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ ited Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con‐ ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de‐ liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information. Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that tempo‐ rarily or permanently store technical informa‐ tion about the condition of the vehicle, events and faults. This technical information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system or the environment: ▷ Operating mode of system components, fill levels for instance. ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration. ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐ tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ ing the stability control system. ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ pair services, service processes, warranty claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ mation can be read out from the event and fault memories by the service personnel, in‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Notes cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ nostic tools. You can obtain further information there if you need it. After an error is corrected, the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis. With the vehicle in use there are situations where you can associate these technical data with individuals if combined with other infor‐ mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with the assistance of an expert. Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer - such as vehicle emergency locating - you can transmit certain vehicle data from the vehicle. Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were operating. conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ quired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment. The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. Reporting safety defects ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. For US customers ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better under‐ standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in‐ jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐ tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 9 Notes wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐ formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Notes I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 11 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 At a glance Cockpit Cockpit Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. All around the steering wheel 1 Roller sunblinds 47 2 Rear window safety switch 46 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion 116 3 Power windows 46 Intelligent Safety 106 4 Exterior mirror operation 57 5 Glove compartment on the driver's side 160 Lane departure warning 114 Driver assistance systems 6 Lights I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Cockpit Front fog lights 95 Reduce distance 124 Parking lights 92 Increase distance 124 Cruise control rocker switch 130, 124 Low beams 92 9 Automatic headlight con‐ trol 93 Entertainment source Adaptive Light Control 93 Volume High-beam Assistant 94 Instrument lighting 95 Voice activation 27 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Turn signal 69 Thumbwheel for selection lists 86 High beams, head‐ light flasher 69 8 Instrument cluster 77 10 Steering wheel buttons, right Daytime running lights 93 7 At a glance 11 Steering column stalk, right High-beam Assistant 94 Wiper 69 Roadside parking lights 93 Rain sensor 70 On-board computer 86 Clean the windshields and head‐ lights 71 12 Steering wheel buttons, left Store speed 130, 124 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 65 Auto Start/Stop function 66 Resume speed 130, 124 13 Horn, total area Cruise control on/off, inter‐ rupt 130 14 Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐ terrupting 124 15 Adjust steering wheel 59 Steering wheel heating 59 16 Unlock hood 205 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 15 At a glance Cockpit All around the center console 1 Control Display 18 2 Ventilation 150 3 9 PDC Park Distance Control 132 Rearview camera 135 Hazard warning system 223 Parking assistant 140 Surround View 135 Central locking system 39 Side View 137 4 Glove compartment 160 5 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐ nication 6 Climate control 145 7 Controller with buttons 18 8 Parking brake 68 10 Driving Dynamics Control 121 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 119 11 Steptronic transmission selector lever 72 Manual transmission selector lever 72 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Cockpit At a glance All around the roofliner 1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ quest 223 4 Reading lights 95 2 Glass sunroof, powered 47 5 Interior lights 95 3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐ senger airbag 99 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 17 At a glance iDrive iDrive Vehicle features and options Control Display This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Hints ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions. ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged. ▷ In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐ lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐ duced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, e.g. through shadow or climate control system, the normal functions are re-established. The concept The iDrive combines the functions of many switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ ated from a central location. Switching on Using the iDrive during a trip 1. Switch on the ignition. To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐ ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other traffic, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow it.◀ 2. Press the controller. Switch off 1. Press button. 2. "Turn off control display" Control elements at a glance Control elements Controller with navigation system 1 Control Display The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on the equipment version, with touchpad Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 iDrive 1. Turn. At a glance Press button Function BACK Displays the previous panel. OPTION Opens the Options menu. Controller without navigation system The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. 1. Turn. 2. Press. 2. Press. 3. Move in four directions. 3. Move in two directions. Buttons on controller Press button Function MENU Open the main menu. RADIO Opens the Radio menu. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu. NAV Opens the Navigation menu. TEL Opens the phone menu. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 19 At a glance iDrive Buttons on controller Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected. Press button Function MENU Open the main menu. Audio Open audio menu last listened to, switch between audio me‐ nus. TEL Opens the phone menu. BACK Open previous panel. OPTION Opens the Options menu. Operating concept Opening the main menu Press button. 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted. 2. Press the controller. Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings". Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. ▷ Move the controller to the left. Closes current display and shows previous display. The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu. Reopens previous display by pressing BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed. ▷ Move the controller to the right. Opens new display on top of previous screen. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 iDrive White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ cate that additional panels can be opened. At a glance 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed. Display of an opened menu When selecting a menu, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: ▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed. ▷ Press the menu button on the controller twice. 3. Press the controller. Opening the Options menu Activating/deactivating the functions Press button. Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. The "Options" menu is displayed. Function is activated. Function is deactivated. Touchpad Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller: Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. Selecting functions 1. "Settings" 2. "Touchpad" Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: 3. Select the desired function. ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers. ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". ▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐ tive map. This area remains unchanged. ▷ Control options for the selected main menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses. ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered letters and numbers. ▷ If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, e.g., "Store station". Changing settings 1. Select a field. Entering letters and numbers Entering letters requires some practice at the beginning. When entering, pay attention to the following: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 21 At a glance iDrive Example: setting the clock ▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters and numbers, it may be necessary to reel via the controller to the corresponding In‐ put mode, refer to page 25, e.g. when the spelling of upper and lower case letters is identical. Setting the clock On the Control Display: 1. ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display. ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐ pends on the set language. Where neces‐ sary, enter special characters via the con‐ troller. Press button. The main menu is dis‐ played. 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. ▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad. ▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in the center of the touchpad. ▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the upper area of the touchpad. 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date". ▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right in the lower area of the touchpad. 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller. Using interactive map and Internet Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the navigation system and Internet sites. Function Controls Move interactive map or Internet sites. Swipe into re‐ spective direc‐ tion. Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on map or Internet sites. the touchpad with fingers. 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. Display the menu or open Tap once. a link in the Internet. Changing settings You may change control display settings via touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 iDrive 6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller. At a glance Symbol Meaning Text message was received. 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller. Check the SIM card. SIM card is blocked. Status information SIM card is missing. Status field Enter PIN. The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: ▷ Time. Entertainment symbols Symbol ▷ Current entertainment source. Meaning ▷ Sound output, on/off. CD/DVD player. ▷ Wireless network reception strength. Music collection. ▷ Phone status. Gracenote® database. ▷ Traffic bulletin reception. AUX-IN port. Status field symbols USB audio interface. The symbols are grouped as follows. Mobile phone audio interface. Radio symbols Additional symbols Symbol Meaning HD Radio station is being received. Symbol Meaning Spoken instructions are turned off. Satellite radio is switched on. Telephone symbols Split screen Symbol Meaning General information Incoming or outgoing call. Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the on-board comupter. Missed call. Wireless network reception strength. Symbol flashes: network search. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu. Wireless network is not available. Bluetooth is switched on. Roaming is active. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 23 At a glance iDrive Without navigation system and telephone Switching the split screen on and off On the Control Display: Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐ tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment, Communication. Press button. 1. 2. "Split screen" Saving a function Selecting the display 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. On the Control Display: 1. 2. Press button. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is selected. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen content". 5. Select the desired menu item. Press and hold the desired button, until a signal sounds. Running a function Press button. The function will work immediately. This means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected. Displaying the button assignment Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at top edge of screen. Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ tions, phone numbers and menu entries. Deleting the button assignments Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. 2. "OK" 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approx. five seconds. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 iDrive At a glance Deleting personal in the vehicle Entering letters and numbers General information The concept On the Control Display: Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves personal data, such as stored radio stations. These personal data can be permanently de‐ leted through iDrive. 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ bers. General information 3. "OK": confirm the entry. Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ lowing data can be deleted: 2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed. Symbol Function Press the controller: delete the let‐ ter or number. ▷ Personal Profile settings. ▷ Stored radio stations. ▷ Stored Favorites buttons. Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers. ▷ Travel and computer information. ▷ Music collection. Switching between cases, letters and numbers ▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. ▷ Phone book. Depending on the menu, you can reel between entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers: ▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies. ▷ Voice notes. ▷ Login accounts. Symbol Function ▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering. Enter the letters. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 30 minutes. Enter the numbers. or Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary. Without navigation system Deleting data Select the symbol. Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐ trol Display. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. "Settings" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete personal data" 5. "Continue" 6. "OK" Tip controller up. Entry comparison Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐ rowed down with every letter entered and let‐ ters may be added automatically. Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle. ▷ Only those letters are offered during input for which data is available. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 25 At a glance iDrive ▷ Target search: names of locations may be entered in languages available through Control Display. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Voice activation system At a glance Voice activation system Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system 1. Press button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command. A command that is recognized by the voice activation system is announced and dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The concept This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ cates that the voice activation system is active. ▷ Most functions displayed on the Control Display can be operated by voice com‐ mands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements during input. If no other commands are available, use func‐ tion via iDrive. ▷ Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the voice activation system. Briefly press the button on the steer‐ ing wheel or ›Cancel‹. ▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side. ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation system. Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ fied. Set the language, refer to page 90. Terminating the voice activation system There are short commands for many functions. You may select lists such as phone lists via voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐ actly as they show in the respective list. Having possible commands read aloud You can have available commands read out loud for you: ›Voice commands‹ E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands for the settings are read out loud. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 27 At a glance Voice activation system Executing functions using short commands 2. Execute functions on the main menu via short commands. It almost doesn't matter which menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹. 3. ›Tone‹ Press button on the steering wheel. List of short commands for the voice activation system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ munication Owner's Manual. Help dialog for the voice activation system Setting the voice dialog Set system to standard dialog or use a short version. The short version of the voice dialog plays back short messages in abbreviated form. Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹ 1. "Settings" Additional commands for the help dialog: 2. "Language/Units" ▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐ tion about the current operating options and the most important commands for them. 3. "Speech type:" 4. Select setting. ▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced. One example: open the tone settings Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller. Adjusting the volume 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if needed. Turn the volume button while giving an in‐ struction until the desired volume is set. 2. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed. Press button on the steering wheel. ▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use. 3. ›Radio‹ 4. ›Tone‹ Hints on Emergency Requests Via short command The desired tone settings can also be started via a short command. 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if needed. Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Voice activation system At a glance This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ ment of a phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 223, close to the interior mirror. Environmental conditions ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐ roof closed to prevent noise interference. ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 29 At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Vehicle features and options Select components This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 1. Press button. 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info". 3. Press the controller. 4. Selecting desired range: ▷ "Quick reference" ▷ "Search by pictures" ▷ "Owner's Manual" Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. It specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. Components of the Integrated Owner's Manual Leafing through the Owner's Manual The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ mation or possible access. Page by page with link access Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed. Quick Reference Guide The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐ tion how to operate the car, how to use basic vehicle functions or what to do in case of a breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ played while driving. Page by page without link access Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐ ping the links. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to browse from page to page. Scroll back. Search by images Image search provides information and de‐ scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ ogy for a feature is not at hand. Scroll forward. Owner's Manual Search for information and descriptions by en‐ tering terms selected from the index. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function You may open the relevant information di‐ rectly. At a glance Programmable memory buttons General information Opening via the iDrive The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly. To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the Options menu: Storing 1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive. 1. Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" 2. Press selected button for more than 2 seconds. Executing Press button. Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐ mediately. "Display Owner's Manual" Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To reel from a function, e. g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays: 1. Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual. 4. Press button again to return to last displayed function. 5. Press button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To alternate permanently between the last dis‐ played function and the Owner's Manual re‐ peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 31 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing Vehicle features and options Overview This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening the trunk lid General information 4 Panic mode The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ trols with integrated key. Integrated key Remote control/key Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐ tery. You may set the key functions depending on the optional features and country-specific ver‐ sion. For Settings, refer to page 43. The vehicle stores personal settings for every remote control. Personal Profile, refer to page 35. The remote controls hold information on re‐ quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐ mote control, refer to page 210 Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐ row 2. The integrated key fits the following locks: ▷ Driver's door. ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side. The storage compartment contains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to page 41. The front passenger glove compartment con‐ tains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to page 41. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Opening and closing Replacing the battery Controls ▷ Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo‐ bile devices in the vehicle. A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐ tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine. Starting the engine with emergency detection of the remote control 1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐ trol. 2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ ment, arrow 2. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing up. 5. Press the cover closed. Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center. New remote controls New remote controls are available from the service center. Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the re‐ mote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake. Lost remote controls can be disabled by your service center. Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the remote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the clutch pedal. Emergency detection of remote control If the remote control is not recognized: slightly change the height position of the remote con‐ trol and repeat the procedure. Loss of the remote controls It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: ▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ mote control by external sources e.g., by radio masts. ▷ Empty battery in remote control. ▷ Interference from radio transmissions through mobile devices in close proximity to remote control. Personal Profile The concept Personal Profile provides three profiles, using which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Every remote control has one of these profiles assigned. If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐ trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 35 Controls Opening and closing vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐ tomatically applied. Profile management If several drivers use their own remote control, the vehicle will adjust the personal settings during unlocking. These settings are also re‐ stored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different remote control. Opening profiles Changes to the settings are automatically saved in the personal profile. 3. Select a profile. Three personal profiles and a guest profile can be created. Adjusting Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐ ferent profile may be activated. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" ▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile are automatically applied. ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐ mote control being used at the time. ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐ ent remote control, this profile will apply to both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐ tiated anymore between the settings for the two remote controls. The settings for the following systems and functions are saved in the active profile. The scope of storable settings is country- and equipment-dependable. ▷ Unlocking and locking. Renaming profiles ▷ Lights. A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐ file to avoid confusion between the profiles. ▷ Climate control. ▷ Radio. 1. "Settings" ▷ Instrument cluster. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Programmable memory buttons. 3. "Options" ▷ Volumes, tone. 4. "Rename current profile" ▷ Control Display. ▷ Navigation. Resetting profiles ▷ Park Distance Control PDC. ▷ Rearview camera The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values. ▷ Side View. 1. "Settings" ▷ Head-up Display. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Driving Dynamics Control. 3. "Options" ▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐ tion, steering wheel position. 4. "Reset current profile" ▷ Cruise control. Exporting profiles ▷ Intelligent Safety. Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐ ported. ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection. This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Opening and closing other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐ file function. Controls Display profile list during start The following export options are available: The profile list can be displayed during each start to select the desired profile. ▷ Via BMW Online. 1. "Settings" ▷ Via the USB port to a USB device. 2. "Profiles" Popular file systems for USB devices are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐ ommended formats for profile export. Other formats may not support the export. 1. "Settings" 3. "Options" 4. "Display user list at startup" Using the remote control 2. "Profiles" Note 3. "Export profile" 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" Take the remote control with you USB interface: "USB device" Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be imported via BMW Online. People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.◀ Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐ ported via the USB interface. Unlocking Importing profiles Press button on the remote control. Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ ported profile. ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are being unlocked. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" ▷ Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti‐ vated. This function is not available, if the interior lamps were switched off manually. 3. "Import profile" 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" USB interface: "USB device" ▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this function was activated. Using the guest profile The guest profile is for individual settings that are saved in none of the three personal pro‐ files. ▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient closing are folded open. You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. For Settings, refer to page 43. This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile. The alarm system, refer to page 44, is dis‐ armed. 1. "Settings" Convenient opening Press and hold this button on the re‐ mote control after unlocking. 2. "Profiles" 3. "Guest" The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not assigned to the current remote control. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 37 Controls Opening and closing The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the remote control is pressed. The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether the vehicle was previously locked or unlocked. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. Locking Locking from the outside Depending on the features and the country version, it is also possible to have door un‐ locked. Create the settings, refer to page 43. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.◀ If the doors were not unlocked, the trunk lid is locked again as soon as it closes. The driver's door must be closed. Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Press button on the remote control. All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are being locked. The alarm system, refer to page 44, is armed. Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.◀ Malfunction Switching on interior lights and courtesy lights Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ lowing circumstances: Press button on the remote control with the vehicle locked. ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replace the battery, refer to page 35. This function is not available, if the interior lamps were switched off manually. If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐ onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐ tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the antitheft warning system, refer to page 45, are turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐ fore pressing the button again. Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power. ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity. Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices. Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. To reel off the alarm: press any button. In the case of interference, the vehicle can also be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐ out remote control, refer to page 39. For US owners only Opening the trunk lid Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Opening and closing Controls Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: FCC ID: ▷ LX8766S. ▷ LX8766E. ▷ LX8CAS. ▷ LX8CAS2. ▷ MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Without remote control Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34. The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside. Alarm system The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key. The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ tion, if needed, through emergency detection of the remote control, refer to page 35. From the inside From the outside Unlocking and locking Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.◀ Remove the key before pulling the door handle Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.◀ Pressing the central locking system button locks or unlocks the vehicle with the front doors closed. The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 39 Controls Opening and closing In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on. Unlocking and opening ▷ Press button on the remote con‐ trol for approx. 1 second. As the case may be, the doors are also un‐ locked. Unlocking with the remote control, refer to page 38. The trunk lid opens. Opening from the inside With the vehicle is stationary, press the button in the driver's footwell. The trunk lid opens. Closing ▷ Press the central locking system button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest. Hints ▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door handle twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked. Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ sult.◀ Keep the closing path clear Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Trunk lid Opening During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.◀ Closing Opening from the outside Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid. ▷ Press button on the trunk lid. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Opening and closing Locking separately The trunk lid can be locked separately with the switch in the glove compartment. If the glove compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be opened. ▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. ▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐ row 2. Controls Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. ▷ Convenient closing. ▷ Open the trunk lid individually. ▷ Open trunk lid with no-touch activation. ▷ Start the engine. Functional requirements Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the central locking system. This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked using valet service. The infrared remote con‐ trol can be handed out without the key. ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐ ence nearby. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle. ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. ▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐ mote control is in the vehicle. Emergency unlocking Unlocking Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk lid unlocks. Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely, arrow. This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control. Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ ing the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote con‐ trol with you, such as in your pants pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 41 Controls Opening and closing Locking In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors fold in. Separately unlocking the trunk lid Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid. This corresponds to pressing mote control button. the re‐ The situation of the doors does not change. Touch the surface on the door handle of the driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐ ing the door handle. This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con‐ sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐ cle. Convenient closing Monitor closing Monitor closing to ensure that no one becomes trapped.◀ Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.◀ Opening trunk lid with no-touch activation The trunk lid can be opened with no-touch ac‐ tivation using the remote control you are carry‐ ing. Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot motion in the center of the area at the rear of the car and the trunk lid opens. Foot movement to be carried out Do not touch vehicle With the foot motion, make sure there is steady stance and do not touch the vehicle; otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from hot exhaust system parts.◀ 1. Place in the center behind the vehicle, about an arm's length from the vehicle rear. Touch the surface on the door handle of the driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with your finger and hold it there without grasping the door handle. 2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐ ately pull it back. With this movement, the This corresponds to pressing and holding the remote control button. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Opening and closing leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors. Controls ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity. Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote control or using the integrated key, refer to page 39. Opening Perform the foot movement described earlier. Adjusting Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐ tem flashes. Unlocking The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ fer to page 35. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. Doors 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" Preventing inadvertent opening In situations where the trunk lid is not to be opened with no-touch activation, ensure that the remote control is located beyond the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear of the car. 3. 4. Select the desired function: ▷ "Driver's door only" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ locks the entire vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐ vertently, for example by an unintentional or misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀ Malfunction Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ lowing circumstances: ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replace the battery, refer to page 35. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power. Select the symbol. ▷ "All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked. Trunk lid Depending on optional features and country version, this setting is not offered in some cases. 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. Select the symbol. 4. Select the desired function: ▷ "Tailgate" The trunk lid is opened. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 43 Controls Opening and closing ▷ "Tailgate + door(s)" objects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀ The trunk lid is opened and the doors are unlocked. The adjustment procedure is interrupted: ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed. Confirmation signals from the vehicle The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ fer to page 35. ▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐ ory is pressed. 1. "Settings" Activating the setting 2. "Doors/key" 1. "Settings" 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ mation signals. 2. "Doors/key" 3. "Last seat position autom." ▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock" Alarm system Automatic locking The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ fer to page 35. 1. "Settings" The concept When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system responds to: ▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid. 2. "Doors/key" ▷ Movements in the interior. 3. Select the desired function: ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the car. ▷ "Lock if no door is opened" The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if no door is opened. ▷ Disconnected battery voltage. The alarm system briefly signals tampering: ▷ "Lock after start driving" ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm. The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off. ▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ tem. Retrieving the seat and mirror settings ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights. The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions used last are stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Arming and disarming the alarm system When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions are automatically retrieved if this function was activated. Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure that the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Otherwise, people might get injured or When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐ cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at the same time. Door lock and armed alarm system The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Opening and closing Trunk lid and armed alarm system The trunk lid can be opened even when the alarm system is armed. After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and monitored again when the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. Controls ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered. Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed. Interior motion sensor To switch off the alarm: press any button. The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly. Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations: ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐ cles, at sea or on a trailer. ▷ With animals in the vehicle. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The system is armed. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ cured. Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ onds and then continues to flash. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor are turned off, until the vehicle is locked again. When the still open access is closed, inte‐ rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on. Switching off the alarm ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ ing: The vehicle has not been tampered with. ▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed through emergency detection of remote control, re‐ fer to page 35. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 45 Controls Opening and closing ▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the remote control on your person, grasp the driver side or front passenger side door handle completely. Power windows ▷ The window closes while the switch is held. ▷ Hint Pull the switch to the resistance point. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically. Pulling again stops the motion. Take the remote control with you See also: closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to page 41. Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not operate the power windows and injure themselves.◀ Pinch protection system Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐ tection Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀ No window accessories Opening Do not install any accessories in the win‐ dow's range of movement; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ ▷ If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a window closes, closing is interrupted. Press the button to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held. ▷ The window reopens slightly. Closing without the pinch protection system Press the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point. The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stopse the motion. See also: Convenient opening, refer to page 37, via remote control. Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐ vent window from closing properly - proceed as follows: Closing Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ 1. Pull the reel past the resistance point and hold it there. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Opening and closing The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin. Extending or retracting roller sunblind for rear window Press button. 2. Pull the reel past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without jam protection. Safety switch Controls Roller sunblinds for the rear side windows Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook it onto the bracket. General information The safety switch in the driver's door can be used to prevent children, e.g., from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear. Switching on and off Do not open the window while the roller sunblind is tilted Do not open the window while the roller sun‐ blind is tilted; otherwise, there is a risk of dam‐ age at high speeds that may result in personal injury.◀ Press button. The LED lights up if the safety func‐ tion is switched on. Glass sunroof, powered General information Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transport‐ ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without super‐ vision.◀ The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐ tion is switched on. Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐ erwise, injuries may result.◀ Roller sunblinds Take the remote control with you Roller sunblind for rear window General information If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐ blind for the rear window after having activated it a number of times in a row, the system is blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐ ing. Let the system cool. Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not operate the glass sunroof and injure them‐ selves.◀ The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot be moved at low interior temperatures. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 47 Controls Opening and closing Tilting the glass sunroof Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or from the tilted position during closing. Push switch briefly upward. ▷ The closed glass sunroof is tilted. ▷ The opened glass sunroof closes until it is in its tilted position. The sliding visor does not move. The glass sunroof reopens slightly. Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐ tection Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together ▷ Press the reel in the desired direction to the resistance point and hold it there. Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐ sor open together as long as the reel is held down. The glass sunroof closes as long as the reel is held down. The sliding visor can be manually closed. ▷ Press the reel in the desired direction past the resistance point. The glass sunroof and sliding visor open automatically. The glass sunroof closes automatically. The sliding visor can be manually closed. Pressing the reel upward stops the motion. Despite the pinch protection system, check that the glass sunroof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be inter‐ rupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.◀ Closing from the open position without pinch protection E. g. if there is an external danger, proceed as follows: 1. Press the reel forward beyond the resist‐ ance point and hold. The pinch protection is limited and the glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin. 2. Press the reel forward again beyond the re‐ sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐ roof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear. Closing from the raised position without pinch protection Additional options: ▷ Convenient opening, refer to page 37, via the remote control. ▷ Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to page 41. Comfort position If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐ pletely opened, the comfort position has been attained. In this position the wind noises in the interior are the least. If there is an external danger, push the reel for‐ ward past the resistance point and hold it. The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐ tion. Initializing after a power failure After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. If desired, continue the movement by pressing the reel. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Opening and closing Controls Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. During the initialization, the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐ erwise, injuries may result.◀ Press the reel up and hold it until the initialization is complete: ▷ Initialization begins within 15 seconds and is com‐ pleted when the glass sun‐ roof is completely closed. ▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐ tection. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 49 Controls Adjusting Adjusting Vehicle features and options Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged.◀ This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Manually adjustable seats At a glance Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 53. ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 54. ▷ Airbags, refer to page 97. Seats Hints 1 Forward/backward 2 Thigh support 3 Seat tilt 4 Backrest width 5 Lumbar support 6 Height 7 Backrest tilt Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐ ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀ Forward/backward Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally pro‐ vided by the belt.◀ Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Adjusting After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ ward or back slightly making sure it engages properly. Controls to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat engages properly. Electrically adjustable seats Height At a glance Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary. Backrest tilt 1 Seat and mirror memory 2 Backrest width 3 Lumbar support 4 Backrest tilt 5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt General information The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the profile currently in use. When the vehi‐ cle is unlocked via the remote control, the po‐ sition is automatically retrieved if the Function, refer to page 44, is activated for this purpose. Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary. Adjustments in detail 1. Forward/back. Seat tilt Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 51 Controls Adjusting 2. Height. Thigh support 3. Seat tilt. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support. Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐ gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture. ▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch. 4. Backrest tilt. The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐ tion of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/ down. Backrest width Change the width of the back‐ rest using the side wings to ad‐ just the lateral support. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Adjusting Front seat heating Controls If the journey is continued within approx. 15 minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ ically with the temperature selected last. When ECO PRO, refer to page 173, is acti‐ vated, the heater output is reduced. Switch off Press button longer. The LEDs go out. Switching on Press button once for each tempera‐ ture level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the journey is continued within approx. 15 minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ ically with the temperature selected last. When ECO PRO, refer to page 173, is acti‐ vated, the heater output is reduced. Safety belts Seats with safety belt The vehicle has five seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt. General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. For the occupants' safety the belt locking mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it. Switch off Press button longer. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. The LEDs go out. The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted. Rear seat heating ▷ The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐ sengers sitting on the left and right. ▷ The center rear safety belt buckle is solely intended for the center passenger. Hints One person per safety belt Switching on Press button once for each tempera‐ ture level. Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 53 Controls Adjusting Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐ jure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable objects, or be pinched.◀ safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. Damage to safety belts Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐ aged otherwise: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked. What reduces the restraining effect Check and replace safety belts Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the restraining effect is reduced.◀ This should only be done by your service center; otherwise, this safety feature might not work properly.◀ Front headrests Buckling the belt Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. Adjusting the head restraint Adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.◀ Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle. Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level. Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. Distance 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐ nism. Safety belt reminder for driver's and passenger's seat Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting the tilt of the backrest. The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐ nal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Adjusting Controls Adjusting the height 1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ sistance. ▷ To raise: push. ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push headrest down. 2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐ straint out completely. Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ able.◀ Tilt Three different tilt positions are available. Rear head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint ▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐ straint forward, arrow 1. ▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head restraint folds as far back as possible. Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. Adjusting the head restraint Adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.◀ Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 55 Controls Adjusting Adjusting the height 1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ sistance. ▷ To raise: push. 2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐ straint out completely. ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push headrest down. Before transporting passengers The center head restraint cannot be adjusted in elevation. Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ able.◀ Folding down head restraints Extending/retracting head restraint Only fold down head restraint if no pas‐ sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted headrests again if passengers are being car‐ ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.◀ Seat and mirror memory Hints Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat could result in an accident.◀ Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged.◀ ▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, arrow 2. ▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints. Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. The concept Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and called up. Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Adjusting At a glance Controls Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐ tions is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: ▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid. ▷ Press a button on the remote control. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button. Mirrors Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. Exterior mirrors 2. Set the desired position. 3. Press button. The LED in the but‐ ton lights up. 4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. The LED goes out. If the SET button is pressed accidentally: Press button again. The LED goes out. General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐ ror setting is stored for the profile currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐ mote control, the position is automatically re‐ trieved if this function is active. Note Calling up settings Estimating distances correctly Comfort function 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Switch off the ignition. 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.◀ The corresponding seat position is performed automatically. The procedure stops when a reel for adjusting the seat or one of the buttons is pressed. Safety mode 1. Close the driver's door or reel on the igni‐ tion. 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is com‐ pleted. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 57 Controls Adjusting At a glance 2. Engage selector lever position R. Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position. Fold in and out Press button. 1 Adjusting 58 Possible at speeds up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor E. g. this is advantageous 3 Fold in and out 58 ▷ In car washes. ▷ In narrow streets. Selecting a mirror ▷ For folding mirrors back out that were folded away manually. To change over to the other mirror: Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. Slide the switch. Adjusting electrically Fold in the mirror in a car wash The setting corresponds to the direc‐ tion in which the button is pressed. Before washing the car in an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.◀ Saving positions Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 56. Adjusting manually Automatic heating In case of electrical malfunction press edges of mirror. Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running. Automatic Curb Monitor Automatic dimming feature The concept Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ med. Photocells are used to control the Interior rearview mirror, refer to page 59. If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g. Activating 1. Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Adjusting Controls Steering wheel Interior rearview mirror, manually dimmable Note Turn knob Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.◀ Adjusting Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror. Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature 1. Fold the lever down. The concept 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ tion. 3. Fold the lever back. Steering wheel heating Photocells are used for control: ▷ In the mirror glass. ▷ On the back of the mirror. Functional requirement For proper operation: Press button. ▷ Keep the photocells clean. ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 59 Controls Transporting children safely Transporting children safely Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. The right place for children Note Note Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.◀ Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat. Transporting children in the rear Deactivating the front-seat passenger airbags If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀ Installing child restraint systems Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint systems provided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident. Hints Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight and size.◀ To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐ tems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐ tive effect can be lost.◀ Manufacturer's information for child re‐ straint systems Ensuring the stability of the child seat Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ straint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ ger airbags, refer to page 99. When installing child restraint systems, make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐ tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐ justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise the stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Transporting children safely of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ rest.◀ On the front passenger seat Deactivating airbags Deactivating the front-seat passenger airbags If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀ After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Controls the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stabil‐ ity of the child seat will be reduced.◀ Adjustable backrest width: before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position. Child seat security Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 99. The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ ten child restraint systems. Seat position and height The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐ nently locked to fasten child restraint systems. Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐ ble and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐ dent. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐ cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐ til the best possible belt guide position is reached. Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the strap completely. 2. Secure the child restraint system with the belt. 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked. Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. Backrest width 2. Remove the child restraint system. Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, the backrest width must be opened completely. Do not change 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 61 Controls Transporting children safely LATCH child restraint system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ dren. Before installing LATCH child restraint systems Note Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐ straint system. Follow manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint systems Assembly of LATCH child restraint systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint systems, observe the operating and safety in‐ formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐ erwise, the level of protection may be re‐ duced.◀ 1. Mount the child restraint system; refer to the user's manual of the system. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly connected. Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses. Note Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐ chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐ duced.◀ Position The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair (2) of LATCH sym‐ bols. Use of inner lower anchors from standard outboard LATCH positions to install a child restraint system in the center is not recommended. For the center position, use the vehicle seat belt instead. Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap Mounting points The respective symbol shows the an‐ chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper Top Tether are marked with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf. Note Mounting eyelets Use the mounting eyes only for the up‐ per retaining strap to secure child restraint systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.◀ Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint system in the event of an accident.◀ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Transporting children safely Controls Locking the doors and windows Rear doors 1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point/eye 5 Rear window shelf Push the locking lever on the rear doors down. 6 Seat backrest 7 Upper retaining strap The door can now be opened from the outside only. Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Remove the mounting point cover. Safety switch for the rear Press button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the rear. 2. Raise the head restraint. 3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint. 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye. This locks various functions so that they can‐ not be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 47. 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down. 6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 63 Controls Driving Driving Vehicle features and options Ignition off Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake. This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐ ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal. All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. P when the ignition is switched off Start/Stop button P is engaged automatically when the ig‐ nition is switched off. When in an automatic car wash, e.g., ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀ The concept Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. The ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped: ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the low beams are activated. Steptronic transmission: The engine starts if the brakes are stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop but‐ ton. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are turned off. Manual transmission: The engine starts with the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed. Ignition on ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are turned off. Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop button without stepping on the brake. ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off. Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐ ton without stepping on the clutch pedal. The low beams switch to parking lights after approx. 15 minutes of no use. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator and warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. Radio ready state Activate radio-ready state: ▷ When the engine is running: press the Start/Stop button. Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving The radio-ready state switches off automati‐ cally: ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ tral locking system. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons: ▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. ▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. ▷ When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights. If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio-ready state if the lights are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped, the daytime running lights are activated. Controls Repeated starting in quick succession Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat‐ edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing a risk of overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.◀ Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds. Diesel engine If the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐ low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐ heating. A Check Control message is displayed. Steptronic transmission Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Starting the engine The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ gine starts. Hints Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ Unattended vehicle Manual transmission Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐ tral. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running; doing so poses a risk of danger. The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ gine starts. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐ mission in selector lever position P or N to pre‐ vent the vehicle from moving.◀ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 65 Controls Driving Engine stop Auto Start/Stop function Hints The concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts again automatically for driving off. Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not start the engine.◀ Apply parking brake and further secure the vehicle if needed. Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.◀ Before driving into a car wash So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐ serve instructions for going into an automatic car wash, refer to page 229. Automatic mode After every start of the engine using the Start/ Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in the last selected state, refer to page 68. When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is available when the vehicle is traveling faster than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h. Engine stop The engine is switched off automatically dur‐ ing a stop under the following conditions: Steptronic transmission Steptronic transmission: Switching off the engine ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ tion D. 1. Engage selector lever position P with the vehicle stopped. ▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed. The radio-ready state is switched on. Manual transmission: 3. Set the parking brake. ▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed. Manual transmission ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed. Switching off the engine 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off. Displays in the instrument cluster The READY display in the tach‐ ometer signals that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready to start the engine automatically. 3. Set the parking brake. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en‐ gine stop have not been met. Controls Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open. Functional limitations The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: ▷ External temperature too low. ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ matic climate control is running. ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level. ▷ The hood was unlocked. Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time. The engine can only be started via the Start/ Stop button. Functional limitations ▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ ature. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned. ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when the cooling function is switched on. ▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ The steering wheel is turned. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ matic climate control is switched on. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ lector lever position D to R, N or M/S. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ At higher elevations. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S. ▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. ▷ The vehicle begins rolling. ▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ matic climate control is switched on. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. ▷ The selector lever is in position N, M/S or R. ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ lowing conditions: ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when the heating is switched on. ▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐ cur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession. ▷ Steptronic transmission: By releasing the brake pedal. ▷ Manual transmission: The clutch pedal is pressed. After the engine starts, accelerate as usual. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 67 Controls Driving Activating/deactivating the system manually Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked. Using the button Parking brake Applying The lever automatically engages after being pulled up. The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set. Press button. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models ▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. Releasing The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button. ▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is activated. Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e. g., when leaving it. 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ matically. Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down. Hints Use while driving On rare occasions if it is necessary to use the parking brake while driving, do not use ex‐ cessive force when applying it. When using it, keep the button on the lever depressed. 2. Set the parking brake. Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. Automatic deactivation In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons as if the driver were absent. Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐ ing the parking brake may cause the rear wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀ To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐ tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions permit. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving The brake lights will not light up if the parking brake is set. Controls Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Signaling briefly Turn signal, high beams, headlight flasher Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash. Turn signal High beams, headlight flasher Hints Do not adjust the exterior mirrors Do not adjust the exterior mirror while driving and when turn signals/hazard warning flashers are on, or else the additional turn sig‐ nal lights in the exterior mirror are out of posi‐ tion and can't be seen.◀ Using turn signals ▷ High beams, arrow 1. ▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2. Washer/wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe Press the lever beyond the resistance point. Hints To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point. Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐ shield Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the wiper motor may be damaged.◀ Triple turn signal activation Do not activate wipers on dry windshield Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.◀ On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal" I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 69 Controls Driving Do not activate wipers with wipers folded away ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once. Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be damaged.◀ ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice. Switching on The concept Interval mode or rain sensor The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐ shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ ror. Activating/deactivating Push wiper lever up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once. The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary. Press button on the wiper lever. ▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up. Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐ hicle comes to standstill. When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper operation is deactivated. Switch off and brief wipe Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐ intentional wiping can cause damages.◀ Push wiper lever down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Single wipe: press down once. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor Controls Fold-out position of the wipers Fold wipers back when you want to change the blades or with pending low temperatures. 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. With icy conditions make sure that blades are not frozen to the windshield. 3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐ onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position. After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated. Turn the thumbwheel. Folding wipers back down Clean the windshield, headlights Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; other‐ wise, the wipers may become damaged when they are activated.◀ 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to their resting position and are ready again for operation. Pull the wiper lever towards you. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ shield and activates the wipers briefly. In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐ lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐ vated. Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze onto the windshield which might impede your viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; operation might damage pump.◀ Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ cally heated while the ignition is switched on. Washer fluid Hints Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause injury if it is used incorrectly. Therefore, keep it away from possible sources of ignition. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐ tainer. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 71 Controls Driving Manual transmission tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ centrate or the equivalent.◀ Shifting Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ Washer fluid reservoir Shifting into 5th or 6th gear When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise, inad‐ vertent shifting into 3rd or 4th gear could lead to engine damage.◀ Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. To overcome the resistance push the selector lever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐ verse gear. Steptronic transmission Selector lever positions D Drive All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ ervoir. Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ centrate and tap water and – if required – with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ turer's recommendations. Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the right mixture. Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system. Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ ferent manufacturers because they can clog the windshield washer nozzles. Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter. Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐ ation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically. R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary. N Neutral: The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car washes, e.g. When the ignition is switched off, refer to page 64, selector lever position P is engaged automatically. P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically: ▷ After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to page 64, or when the ignition is switched I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving off, refer to page 64, and when selector lever position R or D is set. Controls Engaging D, R and N ▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐ tion N is set. ▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D or R is set. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐ lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐ hicle may begin to move. Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ rection, beyond a resistance point if needed. Kickdown After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position. Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. Engaging selector lever positions Press on the brake pedal until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀ ▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector lever position P until the engine is running and the brake is applied. ▷ With the vehicle is stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock. Press unlock button, in order to: ▷ Engage R. ▷ Shift out of P. Engaging P Press button P. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 73 Controls Driving Steptronic Sport transmission: prevent automatic upshifting in M/S manual mode Sport program and manual mode Activating the sport program The Steptronic Sport transmission does not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode once the maximum speed is reached, if one of the following conditions is met: ▷ DSC deactivated. ▷ TRACTION activated. ▷ SPORT+ activated. In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ tor lever position D. The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ vated. Activating the M/S manual mode With the respective transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐ taneously operating the kickdown and the left shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐ duced via the shift paddles when switching briefly from D to manual mode. 1. Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D. Ending the sport program/manual mode 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward. Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. Shift paddles The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster, e.g., M1. Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed. Switching to manual mode ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ wards. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐ lected gear. The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. ▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. ▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle. ▷ With the respective transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by pulling and holding the left shift paddle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode. If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐ sition D with the respective transmission ver‐ sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐ matic mode: Controls Engaging selector lever position N 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start. 3. Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐ tion N. A corresponding Check Control message is displayed. 4. Press the selector lever again into posi‐ tion N within approx. 6 seconds. Position N is displayed in the instrument cluster. 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops. ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. Or ▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own. In the manual mode, after conservative driving for a certain amount of time or if there has been no acceleration or shifting of the shift paddles within a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode. Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch Control Displays in the instrument cluster Hints The selector lever position is dis‐ played, e.g.: P. Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock The concept Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction. Component wear Do not use Launch Control too often; otherwise, this may result in premature wear of components due to the high stress placed on the vehicle.◀ Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 166, period. General information Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from the danger area. Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin the engine. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. Requirements Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles/10 km. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 75 Controls Driving To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel. Start with launch control While the engine is running: 1. Press button or select Sport+ with the Driving Dynamics Control. TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up. 2. Engage selector lever position S. 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake. 4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake. Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐ mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used again. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Displays Controls Displays Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Overview, instrument cluster 1 Fuel gauge 81 5 Engine oil temperature 81 2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 3 Messages, e.g. Check Control 7 Electronic displays 77 4 Tachometer 81 8 Reset miles 82 Electronic displays ▷ Selection lists, refer to page 86. ▷ Date, refer to page 82. ▷ External temperature, refer to page 82. ▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 83. ▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 66. ▷ Transmission display, refer to page 75. ▷ On-board computer, refer to page 86. ▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 82. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 77 Controls Displays ▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to page 78. Red lights ▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to page 83. Safety belt reminder Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. ▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ cation. ▷ Range, refer to page 82. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. ▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 121. ▷ Service requirements, refer to page 83. Airbag system ▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 85. Airbag system and belt tensioner are defective. ▷ Time, refer to page 82. Check Control Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ ice center immediately. The concept Parking brake, brake system The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a text message may appear on the Control Dis‐ play. Indicator/warning lights For additional information, refer to Re‐ lease parking brake, refer to page 68. Front-end collision warning Illuminated: advance warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending dan‐ ger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Increase distance. General information The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ nations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on. Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐ ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential speed. Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐ neuver. Pedestrian warning Symbol in the instrument cluster. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Displays If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds. For additional information, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC, refer to page 119. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated Orange lights Active Cruise Control The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead. For additional information, refer to Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC, refer to page 124. Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐ tected. Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐ quate for operating the system. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol DTC is switched on. For additional information, refer to Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 119, and Dy‐ namic Traction Control, refer to page 120. Flat Tire Monitor FTM The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire. Reduce your speed and stop cau‐ tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐ neuvers. For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐ fer to page 104. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire. Yellow lights Anti-lock Braking System ABS Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak‐ ing force boost in some cases defec‐ tive. Stop carefully. Take into account longer brake travel. Have this checked by the service center immediately. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Flashing: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐ lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving profile to the driving circumstances. Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system checked by the service center. Controls Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be detected. ▷ Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again. ▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform the reset of the system again. ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if needed. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 79 Controls Displays For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor, refer to page 100. Front fog lights Front fog lights are activated. For additional information, refer to Front fog lights, refer to page 95. Steering system Steering system in some cases defec‐ tive. High-beam Assistant Have the steering system checked by the service center. High-beam Assistant is switched on. High beams are activated and off auto‐ matically as a function of the traffic sit‐ Engine functions uation. Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ ice center. For additional information, refer to High-beam Assistant, refer to page 94. For additional information, refer to Onboard Diagnostics socket, refer to page 211. Cruise control The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using the con‐ trol elements on the steering wheel. Lane departure warning System is switched on and under cer‐ tain circumstances warns if a detected lane is left without flashing beforehand. Blue lights For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐ ture warning, refer to page 114. High beams High beams are activated. Green lights For additional information, refer to High beams, refer to page 69. Turn signal Turn signal on. General lamps Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Check Control At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored. The symbol is shown in the display of the instrument For additional information, refer to Turn signal, refer to page 69. cluster. Parking lights, headlight control Text messages Parking lights or headlights are acti‐ vated. For additional information, refer to Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐ fer to page 92. Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐ trol message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lights. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Displays Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display. Depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected. "Owner's Manual" Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual. ▷ They are stored and can be displayed again later. Displaying stored Check Control messages On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" Symbols ▷ Controls "Service request" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the text message. Messages after trip completion Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off. Contact your service center. ▷ "Roadside Assistance" Fuel gauge Contact Roadside Assistance. Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary. Hiding Check Control messages Depending on the equipment version, the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Hints on refueling, refer to page 182. Tachometer Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ played continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ sages are displayed consecutively. Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐ rupted to protect the engine. Engine oil temperature These messages can be faded for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ played again automatically. ▷ Other Check Control messages are faded automatically after approx. 20 seconds. ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low temperature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds. ▷ Normal operating tempera‐ ture: the pointer is in the I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 81 Controls Displays middle or in the left half of the temperature display. Ice on roads ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of the temperature range. A Check Control message is also displayed. Coolant temperature If the coolant along with the engine becomes too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy. Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk of an accident.◀ Time The time is displayed at the bot‐ tom of the instrument cluster. Check the coolant level, refer to page 209. Setting the time and time for‐ mat, refer to page 89. Odometer and trip odometer Date Display ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. The date is displayed in the computer. ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. Setting the date and date for‐ mat, refer to page 89. Show/reset kilometers Range Press the knob. ▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time, the external temperature and the odometer are displayed. Display With a low remaining range: ▷ A Check Control message is displayed briefly. ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset. External temperature If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal sounds. A Check Control message is displayed. There is an increased risk of ice on roads. ▷ The remaining range is shown on the on-board co‐ mupter. ▷ With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking curves aggressively - engine operation might vary. The Check Control message appears continu‐ ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur.◀ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Displays Displaying the cruising range Energy recovery Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the range can also be displayed as bar in the instrument cluster. Display The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted to electrical energy while coasting. The vehicle bat‐ tery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be reduced. 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "Additional indicators" Current fuel consumption Controls Service requirements Instrument cluster Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an effi‐ cient and environmentallyfriendly manner. Instrum. cluster with enhanced features Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an effi‐ cient and environmentallyfriendly manner. The concept After the ignition is turned on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐ tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ nance. Your service specialist can read the current service requirements from your remote con‐ trol. Display Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ cally transmitted to your service center before a service due date. Displaying the current fuel consumption Detailed information on service requirements 1. "Settings" More information on the scope of service re‐ quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "Additional indicators" The bar display for the current fuel consump‐ tion is displayed in the instrument cluster. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" Required maintenance procedures and le‐ gally mandated inspections are displayed. 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 83 Controls Displays Gear shift indicator Symbols Sym‐ bols Description The concept No service is currently required. The system recommends the most fuel effi‐ cient gear for the current driving situation. The deadline for scheduled mainte‐ nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ tion is approaching. Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐ tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐ tronic transmission and with manual transmission. The service deadline has already passed. Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. Manual transmission: displaying Entering appointment dates Symbol Enter the dates for the required inspections. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. Description Fuel efficient gear is set. On the Control Display: Shift up to fuel efficient gear. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Shift down to fuel efficient gear. "Service required" 4. "§ Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" Shift into neutral. 6. Adjust the settings. 7. Confirm. The entered date is stored. Steptronic transmission: displays Automatic Service Request Example Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ cally transmitted to your service center before a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified. Description Fuel efficient gear is set. Shift into fuel efficient gear. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request" I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Displays Speed limit detection Controls Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. The concept Switching on/off Speed limit detection Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera in the area of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐ head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐ bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐ tected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation. The system takes into account the information stored in the navigation system and also dis‐ plays speed limits present on routes without signs. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "Speed limit information" If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ ment cluster via the computer. Display The following is displayed in the instrument cluster: Speed limit detection Current speed limit. Hints Personal judgment The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Speed limit detection is not available. The system assists the driver and does not re‐ place the human eye.◀ At a glance Speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. Camera System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ When signs are concealed by objects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 85 Controls Displays ▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered by a sticker, etc. Display ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing. Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the list in the instrument cluster can differ from the illustration shown. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. Activating a list and adjusting the setting ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. Selection lists in the instrument cluster The concept Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the following can be displayed or operated us‐ ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐ strument cluster and the Head-up Display: ▷ Current audio source. On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list. Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel. ▷ Redial phone feature. ▷ Turn on voice activation system. It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐ namics Control. On-board computer Indication in the info display The information from the com‐ puter is shown in the info display in the instrument cluster. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Displays Calling up information on the info display Controls On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. Select the desired displays. Information in detail Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. Information is displayed in the info display of the instrument cluster. If there is only enough fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display changes. Information at a glance Average fuel consumption Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information in the info display: ▷ Range. ▷ Average consumption, fuel. ▷ Average consumption, fuel. The average fuel consumption is calculated for the period while the engine is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the on-board comupter. Average speed ▷ Average speed. Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed. ▷ Date. ▷ Speed limit detection. ▷ Time of arrival. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. ▷ Distance to destination. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. ▷ ECO PRO bonus range. Adjusting the info display Depending on the vehicle equipment version, you can select what information from the com‐ puter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster. Resetting average values Press and hold the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. Distance to destination The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐ gation system before the trip is started. The distance to the destination is adopted au‐ tomatically. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 87 Controls Displays Time of arrival 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" 4. "Yes" The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en‐ tered in the navigation system before the trip is started. Sport displays The time must be correctly set. The concept On the Control Display, the current values for performance and torque can be displayed if the vehicle is appropriately equipped. Speed limit detection Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 85, function. Trip computer Displaying sport displays on the Control Display The vehicle features two types of board com‐ puters. 1. "Vehicle info" ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as often as necessary. 2. "Sport displays" Speed warning ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an overview of the current trip. The concept Resetting the trip computer Displays a speed, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued. On the Control Display: The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset": all values are reset. "Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a standstill. Displaying, setting or changing the speed warning On the Control Display: Display on the Control Display 1. "Settings" Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display. 2. "Speed" 1. "Vehicle info" 4. Turn the controller until the desired speed is displayed. 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" Resetting the fuel consumption or speed 3. "Warning at:" 5. Press the controller. Speed warning is stored. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Onboard info" I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Displays Controls Activating/deactivating the speed warning 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ nutes are displayed. On the Control Display: 7. Press the controller. 1. "Settings" The time is stored. 2. "Speed" Setting the time format 3. "Warning" 1. "Settings" 4. Press the controller. 2. "Time/Date" Setting your current speed as the speed warning 3. "Format:" On the Control Display: The time format is stored. 4. Select the desired format. 1. "Settings" Automatic time setting 2. "Speed" Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are updated automatically. 3. "Select current speed" 4. Press the controller. The current vehicle speed is stored as the speed warning. 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Auto time set" Settings on the Control Display Date Setting the date Time 1. "Settings" Setting the time zone 2. "Time/Date" 1. "Settings" 3. "Date:" 2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed. 3. "Time zone:" 5. Press the controller. 4. Select the desired time zone. The time zone is stored. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month and year. Setting the time The date is stored. 1. "Settings" Setting the date format 2. "Time/Date" 1. "Settings" 3. "Time:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed. 5. Press the controller. 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The date format is stored. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 89 Controls Displays Language Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness settings may not be clearly visible. Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display: Assist system information 1. "Settings" Display on the Control Display 2. "Language/Units" Information on the Assist system can be dis‐ played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐ play. 3. "Language:" 4. Select the desired language. 1. "Settings" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. 2. "Control display" 3. "Driver assistance info" Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 28. Head-up Display Units of measure The concept Setting the units of measure To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature: 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. Brightness The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road. Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display: Display visibility 1. "Settings" The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by the following factors: 2. "Control display" ▷ Certain sitting positions. 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set. 5. Press the controller. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ play. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. ▷ Wet roads. ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Displays Controls If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐ tings. When the low beams are activated, the bright‐ ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐ ally influenced using the instrument lighting. Switching on/off Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" Adjusting the height 3. "Head-Up Display" On the Control Display: Display 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" Overview 3. "Height" ▷ Speed. 4. Turn the controller. ▷ Navigation system. ▷ Check Control messages. ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. ▷ Driver assistance systems. Setting the rotation Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed. On the Control Display: Selecting displays in the Head-up Display 2. "Head-Up Display" On the Control Display: 4. Turn the controller. 1. "Settings" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. 1. "Settings" 3. "Rotation" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Displayed information" Special windshield 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display. The windshield is part of the system. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. A film in the windshield prevents double im‐ ages from being displayed. Therefore, have the special windshield re‐ placed by a service center only. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 91 Controls Lights Lights Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Parking lights/low beams, headlight control General information Position of switch: , , If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐ cally switched off at these switch settings. Parking lights Position of switch : the vehicle's lights light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Overview Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐ riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and it would then be impossible to start the en‐ gine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to page 93. Low beams Position of switch with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up. 1 Rear fog lights 2 Front fog lights 3 Depending on the equipment: automatic headlight control, Adaptive Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Welcome lights, Daytime running lights Welcome lights When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in position or : parking and interior lights come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked depending on the ambient brightness. 4 Lights off, daytime running lights 5 Parking lights, daytime running lights 6 Depending on the equipment: low beams, welcome lights, High-beam Assistant On the Control Display: 7 Instrument lighting 1. "Settings" Activating/deactivating 2. "Lighting" 3. "Welcome lights" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Lights Controls Headlight courtesy delay feature Activating/deactivating The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the radioready state is switched off. In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ vate the daytime running lights. On the Control Display: Setting the duration 1. "Settings" On the Control Display: 2. "Lighting" 1. "Settings" 3. "Daytime running lamps" 2. "Lighting" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. 3. "Pathway lighting:" 4. Set length of time. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Roadside parking lights Automatic headlight control : the low beams are acti‐ Position of switch vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When emerging from a tunnel during the day, the low beams are not switched off immedi‐ ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. Switching on The low beams always stay on when the fog lights are activated. With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. Personal responsibility The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ ment in determining when to turn the lights on in response to ambient lighting conditions. E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under these conditions, you should always switch on the lights manually.◀ Daytime running lights With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ ning lights light up in position , or . After the ignition is switched off, the park‐ ing lights light up in position . Switch off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction. Adaptive Light Control The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ rameters, the light from the headlight follows the course of the road. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 93 Controls Lights In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or when turning, one of the two front fog lights is switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the inside of the curve is better lighted. fore, manually reel off the high beams in situa‐ tions where required to avoid a safety risk.◀ Activating Activating Position of switch switched on. with the ignition To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. The turning lights are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. When driving in reverse, the turning lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering angle. 1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light switch into position or . 2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐ row. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible. High-beam Assistant The concept When the low beams are activated, this system automatically switches the high beams on and off or suppresses the light in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐ trolled by a camera on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are activated whenever the traffic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams non and off as usual. When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐ tomatically brightened or dimmed. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities. The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams. Depend‐ ing on the version of the system in the vehicle, the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐ ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case, the blue indicator light will stay on. Note Personal responsibility The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐ ment of when to use the high beams. There‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Lights Switching the high beams on and off manually Controls Fog lights Front fog lights The low beams must be switched on. Press button. The green indicator lamp lights up. If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 93, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights. ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐ vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ ton on the turn signal lever. When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on. Instrument lighting Adjusting System limits The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel. ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings. ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ coming traffic on freeways. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs. ▷ At low speeds. Interior lights General information The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐ cally. Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐ trols brightness of some of these features. ▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 95 Controls Lights Overview Setting the brightness The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐ justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Brightness:" 4. Adjust the brightness. 1 Interior lights 2 Reading lamp Switching the interior lights on and off Press button. To reel off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button. Reading lights Press button. Reading lights are located at the front and rear next to the interior lights. Ambient light Depending on your optional features lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the interior. Selecting color scheme On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Ambient:" 4. Select desired setting. With a color scheme selected and welcome lights activated they illuminate in the line's color when vehicle is unlocked. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Safety Controls Safety Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Airbags 1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags 3 Head airbag Front airbags Side airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ equate restraint. In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area. Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 97 Controls Safety Ejection Mitigation The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events. ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries might occur when airbag is activated. ▷ Do not remove the airbag system. ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ bag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way. Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact. Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions. Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags ▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered. ▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐ jects between an airbag and a person. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐ tach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS devices or' mobile phones. ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries might occur when front airbag is activated. ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags. ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the roofliner.◀ Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals. Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐ ploying the airbags Do not touch the individual components imme‐ diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, you may risk burns. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the service center or an authorized repair shop for handling explosives. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐ tem could lead to failure in an emergency or unintentional activation of the airbag - both may lead to injury.◀ Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors. Functional readiness of the airbag system ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests. When the ignition is reel on, the warn‐ ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Safety Controls erational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. Airbag system malfunctioning If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on. ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐ tem checked immediately. In case of a malfunction have airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as expected in case of a severe accident.◀ Automatic deactivation of the frontseat passenger airbags The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ sistance. Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ vated. To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by your vehicle's manufacturer. ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below. ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. Indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, proper functioning of the front passenger air‐ bag might not be assured.◀ Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ structions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.◀ The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐ ger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ ther activated or deactivated. ▷ The indicator lamp lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint fix‐ ing system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated. Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐ tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 99 Controls Safety size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are activated. Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.◀ Detected child seats The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐ quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐ factured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver's/ front passenger's airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐ er's seat. A corresponding message appears on the Control Display. 1. Press the reel and move the respective seat all the way forward. 2. Press the reel forward again. The seat still moves forward slightly. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disap‐ pears. If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ peat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a re‐ peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible. The concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and tire temperature. Hints Tire damage due to external factors With a respective message appearing on Con‐ trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep the accuracy of this function over the longterm. Calibrating the front seats Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Sudden tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐ vance.◀ With use of the system observe further infor‐ mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐ fer to page 189. Functional requirements The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is not assured. Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Safety Controls 2. "Vehicle status" On the Control Display and on the vehicle: 3. 1. "Vehicle info" "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" The status is displayed. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Status control display Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display. "Perform reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive off. 5. Reset tire inflation pressure:"Perform reset". 6. Drive away. All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire. All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires. Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: The tires are shown in gray and the status is displayed. After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The reset is completed automatically while driving. After a successfully completed Reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is displayed. You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically. Low tire pressure message The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ The system is being reset. ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. ▷ Malfunction. Status information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐ pending on the model, tire temperatures. It shows the actual values read; they may vary depending on driving style or weather condi‐ tions. ▷ No reset was performed for the system. The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures before the last reset. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Carry out reset Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Run-flat tires, refer to page 199, are la‐ beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 101 Controls Safety Do not continue driving without run-flat tires 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.◀ A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC Dynamic Stability Control. Actions in the event of a flat tire If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is shown to be correct, it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a reset. In that case, carry out a reset. Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ ing style and road conditions. Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire. A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km. Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐ tem, refer to page 199, can possibly be used for this purpose. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is shown to be correct, it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a reset. Then perform the reset. A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and different self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center. 2. Fixing a flat tire, where applicable with the Mobility System. Continued driving with a flat tire Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if needed. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Your car handles differently when you lose tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐ duced when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change.◀ Run-flat tires Maximum speed Final tire failure You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving and contact your service center.◀ 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Safety Controls Required tire inflation pressure check message ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again. A Check Control message is displayed in the following situations ▷ Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again. ▷ The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done. ▷ Inflation was not carried out according to specifications. ▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last confirmation. In this case: ▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as needed. ▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire change. System limits The system does not function properly if a re‐ set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct. The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply. Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐ tected. Display in the following situations: ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if needed. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center. Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 103 Controls Safety sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. The status is displayed. Initialization When initializing the once set inflation tire pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐ firming the tire inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains. On the Control Display: 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. FTM Flat Tire Monitor "Perform reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive off. 5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". The concept The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ tween the individual wheels while driving. In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. This will be detected and reported as a flat tire. 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes. Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. The system does not measure the actual infla‐ tion pressure in the tires. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐ sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐ tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active. On the Control Display: Do not continue driving without run-flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.◀ 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Run-flat tires, refer to page 199, are la‐ beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Safety When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control is switched on if needed. Controls Run-flat tires Maximum speed System limits You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.◀ Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. ▷ When the system has not been initialized. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface. ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). ▷ When driving with snow chains. Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ ing style and road conditions. Actions in the event of a flat tire Normal tires A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km. 1. Identify the damaged tire. Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐ tem, refer to page 199, can possibly be used for this purpose. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center. 2. Fix the flat tire where applicable using the Mobility System, refer to page 199. A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and different self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 105 Controls Safety Your car handles differently when you lose tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐ duced when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change.◀ Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving and contact your service center.◀ Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Tow-starting and towing For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ At a glance Intelligent Safety Button in the vehicle The concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance system. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐ telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐ tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐ sion. These systems are active automatically every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button: Intelligent Safety button ▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to page 107. Camera ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 112. Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Safety Controls Switching on/off General information The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ cally active after every departure. The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving situation. Press button: the systems are turned off. The LED goes out. Press button: the systems are turned on. The LED lights up. Settings can be made on the Control Display. Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to 35 mph/60 km/h. Detection range Front-end collision warning Depending on the equipment, the collision warning system consists of one of the two sys‐ tems: ▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐ ing function, refer to page 107. ▷ Front-end collision warning with braking function, refer to page 109 Front-end collision warning with City Braking function The concept The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed. The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ ently if needed. The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. A camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system. The front-end collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally the collision warning is delayed avoiding false alarm. It responds to objects if they are detected by the system. Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 107 Controls Safety Switch off Tow-starting and towing For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ At a glance Press button: the system is switched off. The LED goes out. Re-press button: the system is switched on. The LED lights up. Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via iDrive. Button in the vehicle 1. "Settings" 2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" 3. Activate the desired time on the Control Display. The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use. Warning with braking function Intelligent Safety button Display If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display. Camera Symbol Measure The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing. Brake and increase distance. The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing. The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐ ver. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. Prewarning Switching on/off Switching on automatically This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. The system is automatically active after every driving-off. The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Safety Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed. Controls ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐ vention in a possible risk of collision. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous prewarning. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: Braking intervention ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop. Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ vention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ tively moving the steering wheel. Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restric‐ tions are to be considered. System limits Detection range The system's detection potential is limited. Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ sued late. E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ tected: ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. Functional limitations ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF. ▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment version, the field of view of the camera in the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐ scured. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ gine, via the Start/Stop knob. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky. Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ cess of false warnings. Front-end collision warning with braking function The concept The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 109 Controls Safety The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ ently if needed. The automatic braking intervention is executed with limited braking force and for a brief period only. If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, the front-end collision warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐ dar sensor. The front-end collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally the collision warning is delayed avoiding false alarm. Tow-starting and towing General information The system issues a two-phase warning of a possible danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐ uation. Detection range For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ At a glance Button in the vehicle It responds to objects if they are detected by the system. Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Intelligent Safety button Radar sensor A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Safety Controls Warning with braking function Display If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display. Symbol Measure The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing. A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐ tection of vehicles. Brake and increase distance. ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ move layers of snow and ice carefully. The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing. ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor. You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐ ver. Switching on/off Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving-off. Switch off Press button: the system is switched off. The LED goes out. Re-press button: the system is switched on. The LED lights up. Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via iDrive. Prewarning This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning. Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed. 2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by an automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision. 3. Activate the desired time on the Control Display. Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous prewarning. The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use. Braking intervention 1. "Settings" The detection of objects can be influenced by technical system limitations, e. g. pedestrians or stationary objects. Limitations of the detec‐ tion range and functional restrictions are to be considered. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 111 Controls Safety The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with automatic braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐ cle to a complete stop. Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ vention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. No automatic delay occurs. The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ tively moving the steering wheel. System limits Detection range ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF. ▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured. Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ cess of false warnings. Pedestrian warning with city braking function The concept The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐ destrians. The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ lision with pedestrians and includes a braking function. The camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system. The system's detection potential is limited. Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ sued late. General information E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ tected: In daylight the system warns of possible colli‐ sions with pedestrians at speeds from about 6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h shortly before a collision the system supports you with a braking intervention. ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. Under those circumstances it reacts to people who are within the detection range of the sys‐ tem. ▷ Pedestrians. ▷ Stationary objects. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Safety Detection range Controls Tow-starting and towing For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ At a glance Button in the vehicle The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ ided into two areas. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area. Intelligent Safety button Camera Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. Switching on/off Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving-off. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 113 Controls Safety Switch off System limits Press button: the systems are turned off. The LED goes out. Detection range The detection potential of the camera is lim‐ ited. Press button: the systems are turned on. The LED lights up. Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ sued late. Warning with braking function E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ tected: Display If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ nal sounds. Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver. ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour. ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm. Functional limitations Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop. Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ vention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ tively moving the steering wheel. Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restric‐ tions are to be considered. The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF. ▷ If the camera viewing field or the front windshield are dirty or covered. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ gine, via the Start/Stop knob. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky. ▷ When it is dark outside. Lane departure warning The concept Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts you when the vehicle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane. This I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Safety speed, depending on the country version, is between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. Controls Camera When switching on the system below this speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the event of warnings. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ uation. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane. The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. Hints Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐ ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐ cle.◀ Switching on/off Press button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. At a glance Button in the vehicle Display in the instrument cluster ▷ Lines: system is activated. ▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be issued. Issued warning Lane departure warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐ brating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued. End of warning The warning ends: ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ▷ When returning to your own lane. ▷ When braking hard. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 115 Controls Safety ▷ When using the turn signal. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐ med. System limits Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐ uations described above. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐ ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. Hints ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. ▷ When the lane markings are covered by objects. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. At a glance Button in the vehicle ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. Active Blind Spot Detection The concept Active Blind Spot Detection Two radar sensors below the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The system indicates whether there are vehi‐ cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Safety Radar sensors Controls and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes brightly. The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone. System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper. ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. Switching on/off ▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered with stickers. Press button. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Display Lamp in the exterior mirror housing For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: FCC ID: ▷ NBG009014A. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and Information stage ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐ ing indicates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 117 Controls Safety Brake force display After travel has begun, the system is trained about the driver, so that increasing lack of alertness or fatigue can be detected. The concept This procedure takes the following criteria into account: ▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐ ior. ▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommen‐ dation to take a break. ▷ During normal brake application, the outer brake lights light up. ▷ During heavy brake application, the inner brake lights light up in addition. Break recommendation If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break. A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip. Attentiveness assistant The concept The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐ ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐ notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver takes a break. Note After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ mately 45 minutes. System limits The function may be limited in the following situations, for instance, and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all: ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. Personal responsibility The system cannot act as a substitute for the personal assessment of one's physical state and may not detect an increasing lack of alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐ rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐ tected too late and an accident be caused as a result.◀ ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h. ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. ▷ In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently. ▷ When the road surface is poor. ▷ In the event of strong side winds. Function The system is activated each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving stability control systems Controls Driving stability control systems Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐ cle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels. Note Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver. Antilock Brake System ABS The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not even with DSC. ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.◀ The vehicle contains its steering power even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. Do not deactivate DSC when driving with roof load ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ gine. Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roofmounted luggage rack. Brake assistant Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐ ing-critical situation due to the elevated center of gravity.◀ When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the greatest possible braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ tance to a minimum during emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Overview Button in the vehicle Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop. DSC Dynamic Stability Control The concept DSC OFF button DSC prevents traction loss in the power wheels when driving off and accelerating. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 119 Controls Driving stability control systems Indicator/warning lights The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions or loose road surfaces, e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ what limited driving stability. The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ trols the drive and braking forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves. failed. Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves. Therefore drive with appropriate caution. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: Deactivating DSC Press and hold this button but not lon‐ ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. The DSC system is switched off. The steering and, depending on the equip‐ ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving. ▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or driving off from loose grounds. ▷ When driving with snow chains. Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control Activating DTC Press button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up. Activating DSC Press button. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out. Deactivating DTC Press button again. Indicator/warning lights TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ tor lamp go out. When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated. xDrive DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized. xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐ tributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving stability control systems Controls Dynamic Damping Control Driving Dynamics Control The concept The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ eling on uneven road surfaces. The Driving Dynamics Control helps to finetune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐ ous programs can be selected for this purpose. The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC OFF buttons can each be used to activate a program. The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort fitting road surface and driving style. Programs The system offers several different programs. Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 121. Overview Button in the vehicle SPORT Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ sorbers for greater driving agility. SPORT+ Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ sorbers for greater driving agility when driving with limited driving stabilization. Operating the programs COMFORT/ECO PRO Press button Balanced control of the vehicle. Program DSC OFF Variable sport steering TRACTION The variable sport steering increases the steering angle of the front wheels at large steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or when parking. Steering becomes more direct. SPORT+ It also varies the force required to turn the wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed. This results in a sporty steering response. In addition, it becomes easier to steer during parking and maneuvering. SPORT COMFORT ECO PRO Automatic program change The system may automatically switch to COM‐ FORT in the following situations: ▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control. ▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control. ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. ▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐ TION or DSC OFF mode. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 121 Controls Driving stability control systems DSC OFF Activating SPORT When DSC OFF, refer to page 120, is active, driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves. Press button repeatedly until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster. Configuring SPORT TRACTION When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 120, is activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐ celeration and when driving in curves. When the display is activated on the Control Display, refer to page 123, the SPORT driving mode can be set to individual specifications. ▷ Activating SPORT. ▷ "Configure SPORT" ▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode. SPORT+ Sporty driving with optimized suspension and adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐ bilization. SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐ vated: 1. "Settings" Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. 2. "Driving mode" The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks. 3. "Configure SPORT" 4. Configure driving mode. Activating SPORT+ Press button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the instrument cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up. Automatic program change This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT driving mode is activated. COMFORT For a balanced tuning with maximum driving stabilization. Activating COMFORT When activating cruise control, the program automatically switches to SPORT mode. Press button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT is displayed in the instrument Indicator/warning lights cluster. SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: Dynamic Traction Control is activated. In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page 121. ECO PRO SPORT Depending on the equipment, consistently sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and engine control for greater driving agility with maximum driving stabilization. The program can be configured to individual specifications. The configuration is stored for the profile currently in use. ECO PRO, refer to page 173, provides consis‐ tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐ zation. Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving stability control systems Controls The program can be configured to individual specifications. 3. "Driving mode info" Activating ECO PRO Drive-off assistant Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster. This system supports driving off on inclines. The parking brake is not required. 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. Configuring ECO PRO 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐ out delay. 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Make the desired settings. Configuring driving program Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Driving mode: ▷ SPORT, refer to page 122. For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐ sions, the possible holding duration amounts to 2 minutes. Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly. ▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 174. Driving off without delay Displays Program selection Pressing the button displays a list of the selectable programs. Depending on your vehicle's op‐ tional features, the list in the in‐ strument cluster can differ from the illustration shown. Selected program The instrument cluster displays the selected program. Display on the Control Display Program changes can be displayed on the Control Display. After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐ ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to roll back.◀ Servotronic The concept The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐ quired to turn the wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐ ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐ creases, the assistance of the steering force is reduced. Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐ ing to the driving program, so that a direct, sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐ veyed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 123 Controls Driving comfort Driving comfort Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐ erates to the desired speed. The speed is also maintained downhill, but may not be maintained uphill if engine power is insufficient. General information Depending on the driving settings, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas. Hints Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC Personal responsibility The concept Use this system to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear roads. To the extent possible, the system automati‐ cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. Even an active system holds the driver responsible for his or her driving, particularly for staying in your lane, adjusting your speed, keeping your distance and for your driving style all in relation to traffic. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed, e.g. through braking, steering or make evasive maneuvers - risk of accident.◀ The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ tomatically reduces the speed, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐ cle ahead begins moving faster. If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ riod, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. Your own vehicle will brake automatically and then accelerate again. If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐ celerator pedal or press the appropriate button to reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐ matically accelerate. Unfavorable weather conditions In the event of unfavorable weather and light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer recognition of vehicles as well as short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already de‐ tected. Drive attentively, and react to the cur‐ rent traffic situation. Intervene actively when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving comfort Controls Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against moving on its own. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning: set the parking brake and ensure that the Steptronic transmission is in position P. Other‐ wise, the vehicle may begin to move.◀ Overview A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐ tection of vehicles. Buttons on the steering wheel Press but‐ ton Function ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ move layers of snow and ice carefully. System on/off, interrupt, refer to page 125 Store, maintain speed, refer to page 126 Resume speed, refer to page 127 ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor. Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control Switching on Press button on the steering wheel. Reduce distance, refer to page 127 Increase distance, refer to page 127 The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the current speed. rocker switch: Cruise control can be used. Maintain, store, change speed, refer to page 126 Switch off Deactivated or interrupted system Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country specifica‐ tions. With deactivated or interrupted system use your brakes, steering and moves as usual to avoid the chance of an accident.◀ Radar sensor To switch off the system while standing, step on brake pedal at the same time. A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle. Press button. ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 125 Controls Driving comfort Interrupting Maintaining/storing the speed When active, press the button. Press button. Or: If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: ▷ When the brakes are applied. ▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ gaged. ▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated. Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted. ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving Dynamics Control. ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are opened while the vehicle is standing still. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. ▷ If the system has not detected objects for an extended period, e.g., on a road with very little traffic without curb or shoulder markings. This is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster. Displays in the instrument cluster, refer to page 127. ▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ rupted, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on if needed. Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed Changing the speed Hints Adjusting the desired speed Modify desired speed to road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Differences in speed Large differences in speed relative to ve‐ hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐ sated by the system for example in the follow‐ ing situations: ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving vehicle. ▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves into the wrong lane.◀ Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving comfort Distance To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐ matically, press the accelerator or press the RES or SET button. Select a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.◀ Reduce distance Press button repeatedly until the de‐ sired distance is set. Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ tance, refer to page 127. Increase distance Press button repeatedly until the de‐ sired distance is set. Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ tance, refer to page 127. Controls Rolling bars in the distance display indicate that the the vehicle detected by the radar sen‐ sor has driven off. Your vehicle was brought down to a halt through stepping on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle: 1. Press button to call up a stored desired speed. 2. Release the brake pedal. 3. Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away. Displays in the instrument cluster Desired speed ▷ The marking lights up green: the system is active. Calling up the desired speed and distance ▷ The marking lights up or‐ ange: the system has been interrupted. While driving Press button with the system switched on. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. Brief status display Selected desired speed. ▷ When the ignition is switched off. While standing The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill: ▷ Green marking in the speedometer: Your vehicle accelerates automatically as soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐ dar sensor moves off. ▷ Speedometer markings turn orange: no au‐ tomatic driving off. If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements are currently not ready for operations. Distance to vehicle ahead of you Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐ ing ahead of you. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 127 Controls Driving comfort The conditions are not adequate for the sys‐ tem to work. Distance display Distance 1 The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. Distance 2 The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: Distance 3 You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver. Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on. Displays in the Head-up Display The system has been interrupted or distance control is temporarily sup‐ pressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected. Distance control is temporarily sup‐ pressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was detected. Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away. ACC is no longer accelerating. To accelerate further, activate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal, pressing the RES but‐ ton or rocker switch. Some system information can also be dis‐ played in the Head-up Display. System limits Speed range The system is best used on well-constructed roads. The minimum speed that can be set is 20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that can be set depends on the vehicle. The system can also be activated when sta‐ tionary. Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐ uation when using the system. Detection range Indicator/warning lights Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lights do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ The vehicle symbol lights up orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you. The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The detection lidacity of the system and the automatic braking lidacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for instance might not be detected. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving comfort Limited detection potential Because of the limited possible detec‐ tion, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene if needed; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Deceleration The system does not decelerate when a sta‐ tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic congestion. Controls tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐ hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐ vers, if needed. You must react yourself; other‐ wise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Unexpected lane change The system also does not respond to: ▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road users. ▷ Red traffic lights. ▷ Stationary objects. ▷ Cross traffic. ▷ Oncoming traffic. No warnings A warning may not be issued when ap‐ proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐ stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐ cle, you yourself must react, as the system does not react to stopped vehicles. Cornering Swerving vehicles A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle. Swerving vehicles If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. In tight curves the system offers only restricted detection where a vehicle ahead of you might be detected late or not at all. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 129 Controls Driving comfort Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, e.g. When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐ ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐ ating. After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐ activated and controls speed independently. Driving away In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example: ▷ On steep inclines. A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails. Cruise control The concept The system maintains a preset speed via the buttons on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking is insufficient. General information ▷ From behind bumps in the road. Depending on the driving settings, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas. In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal. Radar sensor Hints For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: FCC ID: Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ stant speed, e.g.: ▷ On winding roads. ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ OAYARS3-A Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ cle and cause an accident.◀ ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving comfort Overview Controls ▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not en‐ gaged. Buttons on the steering wheel ▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐ rent speed. Press button Function System on/off, interrupt ▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged. Store speed ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated. ▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving Dynamics Control. Resume speed rocker switch: change, hold, store speed Controls Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed Hints Adjusting the desired speed Switching on Press button on the steering wheel. The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used. Modify desired speed to road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Maintaining/storing the speed Press button. Switch off Or: Deactivated or interrupted system With deactivated or interrupted system use your brakes, steering and moves as usual to avoid the chance of an accident.◀ Press button. ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted. Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted. Interrupting When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. When active, press the button. The system is automatically interrupted if: ▷ The brakes are applied. This is displayed, refer to page 132, in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 131 Controls Driving comfort Desired speed When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on if needed. ▷ The marking lights up green: the system is active. ▷ The marking lights up or‐ ange: the system has been interrupted. Changing the speed Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. Brief status display Selected desired speed. If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements are currently not ready for operations. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. The maximum speed that can be set de‐ pends on the vehicle. Displays in the Head-up Display ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ celerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐ hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. Resuming the desired speed Press button. Some system information can also be dis‐ played in the Head-up Display. PDC Park Distance Control The concept PDC is a support when parking. When you slowly approach an object in the rear - or also in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ ble - then the object is reported through: ▷ Signal tones. ▷ Visual display. The stored speed is reached and maintained. General information Displays in the instrument cluster Indicator lamp Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure the distances from objects. Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ tem is switched on. An acoustic warning is first given: The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐ stacle and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. ▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐ ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving comfort Controls ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m. Switching on/off To ensure full functionality: Switching on automatically ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers, bicycle racks. With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ tion P R. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if needed. Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility while driving. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed - risk of accident.◀ Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐ tive. For technical reasons, the system may other‐ wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀ With front PDC: button in vehicle Press button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Display Signal tones Avoid driving fast with PDC Overview With front PDC: switching on/off manually When approaching an object, an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object. E. g. if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. With front PDC: if objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded. The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission. Volume PDC Park Distance Control The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐ justed similar to the sound and volume set‐ tings of the radio. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 133 Controls Driving comfort Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds. False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. ▷ In heavy rain. The range of the sensors is represented in the colors green, yellow and red. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ played, the reel can be made to PDC: ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. "Rear view camera" ▷ On rough road surfaces. ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. System limits Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances: ▷ In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐ rages. ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ Through heavy pollution. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines. The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐ ous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐ ger present, the system is again fully func‐ tional. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ aged or out of position. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ treme heat or strong wind. Malfunction ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded area on the Control Display. ▷ With moving objects. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. To ensure full functionality: ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐ sors. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving comfort ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Controls At a glance Button in the vehicle Surround View The concept Surround View comprises various camera as‐ sistance systems that help the driver when parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits and intersections. ▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 135 Rearview camera ▷ Side View, refer to page 137. ▷ Top View, refer to page 138. Camera Rearview camera The concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display. Hints Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dent could result from road users or objects that are not lidtured by the camera.◀ The camera lens is located in the handle of the tail gate. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the camera lens, refer to page 232. Switching on/off Switching on automatically With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ tion P R. The rearview camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if needed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 135 Controls Driving comfort Switching on/off manually ▷ They help you to estimate how much space is needed when parking and maneu‐ vering on level pavement. Press button. ▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐ ing angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. Turning circle lines Switching the view via iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on: "Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed. Display on the Control Display Functional requirement ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. Activating assistance functions ▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐ posed on the rearview camera image to‐ gether with pathway lines. More than one assistance function can be ac‐ tive at the same time. ▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐ sible turning radius on a level road. ▷ Parking aid lines ▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐ ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐ tain angle. ▷ The trunk lid is fully closed. "Parking aid lines" Lanes and turning radius are indicated. ▷ Obstacle marking Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking" Spatially-shaped markings are displayed. Pathway lines Obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. ▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera. Their colored margins match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐ tance to the object shown. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving comfort Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ dius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space. Controls System limits Detection of objects Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system. Assistance functions also take into account data of the PDC. Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to page 132. The objects displayed on the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning radius line. Side View The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐ tively late from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐ cle record the traffic situation on each side. Display settings Hints Brightness The images from both cameras are shown si‐ multaneously on the Control Display. With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Check the traffic situation as well Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Contrast With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located out‐ side the picture area of the Side View cam‐ eras.◀ Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 137 Controls Driving comfort At a glance Switch the system back on if needed. Display Button in the vehicle The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display. Side View Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle. Cameras Brightness With the Side View switched on: 1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Contrast Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ ture the image. With the Side View switched on: 1. The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper. "Contrast" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 232. System limits Switching on/off The cameras lidture a maximum range of 330 ft/100 m. Switching on/off manually Top View Press button. The concept Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Top View provides assistance in parking and maneuvering. The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Control Display for this purpose. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving comfort General information Controls Cameras The image is lidtured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the rearview camera. The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear. In this way, obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors are detected early. Hints Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dent could result from road users or objects that are not lidtured by the camera.◀ The lenses of the Top View camera are located at the bottom in the mirror housings. The im‐ age quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 232. Switching on/off Overview Switching on automatically Button in the vehicle With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ tion P R. The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if needed. Top View Switching on/off manually Press button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Top View is displayed. Display Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 139 Controls Driving comfort When the distance to an object is small, a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC display. track line is continuously adjusted for the steering wheel movement. "Parking aid lines" Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed. System limits Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐ uations: ▷ With a door open. ▷ With the trunk lid open. ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in. The display appears as soon as Top View is activated. ▷ In poor light. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ played, it is possible to reel to top view: "Rear view camera" Parking assistant Brightness The concept With Top View switched on: 1. A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Contrast With Top View switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Displaying the turning radius and pathway lines ▷ The static, red turning radius line shows the space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way. ▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space ac‐ tually needed to the side of the vehicle. The lane line depends on the engaged gear and the current steering angle. The This system assists the driver in parking paral‐ lel to the road. The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ sible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure. When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information and instructions issued by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐ view camera and react accordingly. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 132. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving comfort Hints Controls ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Personal responsibility Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility while driving. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed - risk of accident.◀ Suitable parking space ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Regarding the parking procedure Changes to the parking space Changes to the parking space after it was measured are not taken into account by the system. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ dent.◀ ▷ Doors and trunk lid closed. ▷ Parking brake released. ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be set where applicable. Overview Transporting cargo Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the vehicle is not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. Button in the vehicle Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ dent.◀ Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐ cle over or onto curb if need be. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐ cle may become damaged.◀ Parking assistant An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐ cally when the parking assistant is activated. Requirements For measuring parking spaces ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 141 Controls Driving comfort Ultrasound sensors Display on the Control Display System activated/deactivated Symbol Meaning Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated. The system is activated. The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the side of the vehicle. System status To ensure full functionality: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. ▷ Do not put stickers over sensors. Switching on/off ▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant is activated and search for parking space active. Switching on with the button Press button. The LED lights up. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Parking assistant is activated automatically. Switching on with the reverse gear ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ lighted. ▷ Shift into reverse. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. To activate: "Parking Assistant" Switch off The system can be deactivated as follows: ▷ Press button. The parking procedure is ac‐ tive. Steering control has been taken over by system. ▷ Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ activated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray. ▷ Switch off the ignition. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving comfort Parking using the parking assistant Check the traffic situation as well Louds noises outside and inside the ve‐ hicle can drown out the parking assistant's and PDC's signals. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan‐ ger of an accident.◀ 1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐ vate it if needed. The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move. The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ cated on the Control Display. 3. Adjust the parking position yourself if needed. The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time: ▷ ▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces. ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome, such as curbs. ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly arise. ▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays clearances that are too small. ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded. ▷ If a turn signal has been actuated contrary to the desired side for parking. ▷ When switching to another function on the Control Display. A Check Control message is displayed. Resume An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ tinued if needed. Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this. System limits Interrupting manually ▷ Controls "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on the Control Display. Press button. No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ tance in the following situations: ▷ In tight curves. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering. ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads. ▷ On slippery ground. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the Control Display. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space. ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 143 Controls Driving comfort ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ aged or out of position. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ treme heat or strong wind. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With moving objects. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Climate control Controls Climate control Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Automatic climate control 1 Seat heating, left 53 6 Temperature 2 Vent settings 7 Seat heating, right 53 3 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function 4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode 5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor Hints the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 145 Controls Climate control Climate control functions in detail The cooling function, refer to page 146, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ gram. Manual air distribution Turn the wheel to select the de‐ sired program or the desired in‐ termediate setting. ▷ Windows. ▷ Upper body region. ▷ ▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐ well. Footwell. Temperature Turn the ring to set the desired temperature. The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if needed by increasing the cooling or heating output, and then keeps it constant. Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ just the set temperature. Defrosts windows and removes condensation Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐ crease the air flow and temperature, and, if needed, use the cooling function. Cooling function The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running. Rear window defroster Press button. Press button. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ ting, warmed again. Air flow, manual Depending on the weather, the windshield and side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ gine is started. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow. The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ duced automatically to save battery power. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. AUTO program When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 168, devel‐ ops that exits underneath the vehicle. Press button. Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ ture are controlled automatically. Depending on the selected temperature and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. Recirculated-air mode You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Climate control Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode: ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ nently blocked. Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ tain amount of time in order to avoid window fogging. If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐ lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if needed. Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ Controls Switching the system on/off Switch off Press the left button for the minimum speed. Switching on Press any button except ▷ Rear window defroster. ▷ Seat heating. Microfilter In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 210, of your vehi‐ cle. Automatic climate control with enhanced features 1 Seat heating, left 53 2 Temperature, left I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 147 Controls Climate control 3 AUTO program 10 Air distribution, right 4 Display 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity 5 Maximum cooling 12 Air distribution, left 6 Temperature, right 13 Rear window defroster 7 Seat heating, right 53 8 Cooling function 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep clear 9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ lated-air mode 15 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐ tion Hints Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ Climate control functions in detail Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function, refer to page 149, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ gram. At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ trols the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible. Intensity of the AUTO program Temperature With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ matic intensity control can be changed. Turn the ring to set the desired temperature. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ sity. The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if needed by increasing the cooling or heating output, and then keeps it constant. The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ just the set temperature. AUTO program Maximum cooling Press button. The system is set to the lowest tem‐ perature, optimum air flow and air circulation mode. Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ gion. The vents need to be open for this. Press button. Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ ture are controlled automatically. The function is available above an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the engine running. Adjust air flow with the program active. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Climate control Cooling function Controls Sufficient ventilation The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running. Press button. The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ ting, warmed again. Depending on the weather, the windshield and side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ gine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 168, devel‐ ops that exits underneath the vehicle. Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode: When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀ Manual air distribution Press button repeatedly to select a program: ▷ Upper body region. ▷ Upper body region and footwell. ▷ Footwell. ▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only. ▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell: driver's side only. If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ sor. Air flow, manual To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐ gram first. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow. ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off automatically. ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ manently blocked. Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ tain amount of time in order to avoid window fogging. If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield. The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power. Rear window defroster Press button. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 149 Controls Climate control Ventilation Defrosts windows and removes condensation Front ventilation Press button. Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ moved from the windshield and the front side windows. For this purpose, point the side vents onto the side windows as needed. Adjust air flow with the program active. If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ sor. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 1. Switching the system on/off ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 2. Switch off ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature in the upper body region, arrow 3. Press the left button for the minimum speed. Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer. The set interior temperature for the driver and passenger are not changed. Switching on Press any button except ▷ Rear window defroster. Adjusting the ventilation ▷ Seat heating. ▷ Ventilation for cooling: Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's interior is too hot. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. ▷ Draft-free ventilation: Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 210, of your vehi‐ cle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Climate control Controls Preselecting the reel-on time Ventilation in the rear On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Set the desired time. Activating the reel-on time On the Control Display: ▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and closing of the vents, arrow 1. 1. "Settings" ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ row 2. 3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2" Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 3. 2. "Climate" The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐ vated. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐ vated. Parked-car ventilation The concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐ cle interior and lowers its temperature, if needed. The system can be switched on and off at any external temperature, either directly or by us‐ ing two preset reel-on times. It remains switched on for 30 minutes. Open the vents to allow air to flow out. Switching on/off directly On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate comf. ventilation" The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes if the system is switched on. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 151 Controls Interior equipment Interior equipment Vehicle features and options Compatibility This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ ing or in the instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is gener‐ ally compatible with the universal garage door opener. If you have any questions, please contact: ▷ Your service center. ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. Universal Integrated Remote Control HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. Control elements on the interior rearview mirror The concept The universal garage door opener can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐ tems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The universal garage door opener re‐ places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program‐ med with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. During programming During programming and before activat‐ ing a device using the universal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐ mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐ trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐ jury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀ Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security. ▷ LED, arrow 1. ▷ Buttons, arrow 2. ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ quired for programming. Programming General information 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup: Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Interior equipment erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ pends on the manual transmitter. 4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be program‐ med on the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ gin flashing slowly. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ rior rearview mirror has been programmed. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ tween the interior rearview mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distan‐ ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. 6. To program other functions on other but‐ tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ rior rearview mirror buttons. Special feature of the alternatingcode wireless system If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features an alternat‐ ing-code system. Controls rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features an alternating-code system. Flashing and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐ peat for approximately 20 seconds. For systems with an alternating-code system, the universal garage door opener and the sys‐ tem also have to be synchronized. Please read the operating manual to find out how to synchronize the system. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ ond person. To synchronize: 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ mote-controlled system. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described. 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. 4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐ zation is complete, the programmed func‐ tion will be carried out. Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror button to be programmed. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter. Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear‐ view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 153 Controls Interior equipment 4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held trans‐ mitter. proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐ idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the in‐ terior rearview mirror. Digital compass Overview If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. 1 Control button 2 Mirror display Mirror display Controls The point of the compass is displayed in the mirror when driving straight. Before operation Before operating a system using the uni‐ versal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the range of movement of the remote-controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀ The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear‐ view mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐ nal is being transmitted. Deleting stored functions Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐ Operating concept Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the con‐ trol button is pressed: ▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting. ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting. Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐ cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐ fer to World map with compass zones. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Interior equipment Controls World map with magnetic zones Procedure Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror. 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle. 2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ trol button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corre‐ sponds with your location appears in the mirror. The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ pass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds. Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following: ▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. ▷ The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel. ▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐ played. 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐ cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass. Left/right-hand steering The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory. Setting the language Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button again to reel between English "E" and German "O". I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 155 Controls Interior equipment Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ mately 10 seconds. Sun visor Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Glare shield Fold the sun visor down or up. Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on. The lighter is located next to the ashtray. Ashtray/cigarette lighter Push in the lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out. Ashtray Opening Connecting electrical devices Hints Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an increased power consumption.◀ Raise cover. Emptying Take out the insert. Replace the cover after use Lighter Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐ erwise, there is a danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.◀ Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Sockets General information The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run‐ ning or when the ignition is switched on. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Interior equipment Controls In the trunk Note The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors. Front center console The socket is located on the left side in the trunk. USB interface for data transfer Raise the lid and remove the cover or cigarette lighter. The concept Rear center console Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: ▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35. ▷ Music collection. ▷ Importing Trips. Hints Observe the following when connecting: ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ nector into the USB interface. Remove the cover. ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or lights to the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. ▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐ ing external devices. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 157 Controls Interior equipment Without telephone: overview Hints Danger of jamming Before folding down the rear seat back‐ rests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests when the middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐ jury or damage may result.◀ The USB interface is located in the glove com‐ partment. With telephone: overview Ensuring the stability of the child seat When installing child restraint systems, make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐ tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐ justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise the stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ rest.◀ Retract the head restraint if needed be‐ fore backrest is folded down The USB interface is located in the center arm‐ rest. With folding head restraints, fold in the head restraints before folding down the rear seat backrests, or damage may result.◀ Opening Through-loading system 1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety belt in the rear using the latch plate of an‐ other safety belt. The concept The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest. The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. 2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt into the specially designated fixture on the rear window shelf. If equipped with through-loading system: the rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20– 40. The sides can be folded down separately or to‐ gether. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Interior equipment 3. Push the corresponding head restraint down as far as it will go. 4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area to release the rear seat backrest. Controls To secure cargo, refer to page 170, with nets or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with lashing eyes. Folding down the middle section 1. Fold in the middle head restraint. 2. Reach into the recess and pull the middle section forward. 5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves forward slightly. 6. Fold backrest forward. Closing 1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seating position and engage it. Ensure that the lock is securely en‐ gaged Make sure that the lock engages properly when folding back, otherwise transported cargo could enter the car's interior during braking or evasive maneuvers and endan‐ ger the vehicle's occupants.◀ 2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on the rear window shelf. 3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the center safety belt. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 159 Controls Storage compartments Storage compartments Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to page 161. ▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats. ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center console, refer to page 162. Glove compartment Front passenger side Note Hints Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately No loose objects in the car's interior Do not stow any objects in the car's inte‐ rior without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants e.g., during braking and evasive maneuvers.◀ Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐ board Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ cur during accidents.◀ Opening Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dash‐ board.◀ Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail‐ able in the vehicle interior: Pull the handle. ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side, refer to page 160. The light in the glove compartment switches on. ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer to page 161. Closing ▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage compartment, in front of the cupholders, refer to page 161. Fold cover closed. ▷ Storage compartment in the front center armrest, refer to page 161. The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key to separately secure the trunk lid, refer to page 41, e.g. Locking I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Storage compartments This prevents access to the glove compart‐ ment and to the trunk. After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ mote control can be handed over, such as at a hotel, without the integrated key. Driver's side Note Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ cur during accidents.◀ Controls Compartments in the doors Do not stow any breakable objects Do not store any breakable objects, e. g. glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐ cident.◀ Center armrest Front A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats. Opening Opening Fold the center armrest up. Pull the handle. Repositioning Closing Fold cover closed. Center armrest can be pushed forwards or backwards. It engages in the end positions. Front storage compartment Connection for an external audio device An external audio device, e.g., an MP3 player, can be con‐ nected via the AUX-IN port or the USB audio interface in the center armrest. Raise the lid to open it. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 161 Controls Storage compartments Storage compartment in the rear To open: press the button. A storage compartment is located in the center armrest. To close: push both covers back in, one after the other. Pushing back the covers Push back the covers before folding up the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder could become damaged.◀ Cupholders Hints Clothes hooks Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.◀ Front Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐ er's view.◀ No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐ neuvers.◀ The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐ dles in the rear. Storage compartments in the cargo area Storage compartment A storage compartment is located on the left side. Rear Located on the right side is a storage compart‐ ment for the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 212, and first aid kit, refer to page 224. In the center armrest. Net Small objects can be stowed in the net on the left side. Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Storage compartments Controls Multi-function hook A multi-function hook is located on each side of the trunk. The multi-function hooks can be loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg. Raise the cargo floor panel, arrow 1, and latch at top, if needed, arrow 2. Partitioning the compartment The compartment can be divided using an at‐ tachable partition. Lightweight objects only Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shop‐ ping bags, from the multifunction hooks. Oth‐ erwise, there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured.◀ Retaining strap A retaining strap is available on the right side trim for fastening small objects. Lashing eyes in the cargo area To secure the cargo, refer to page 170, there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area. Floor net The floor net can also be used to Secure the load, refer to page 170, and to store small parts. Storage compartment under the cargo floor panel Maximum load To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/ 20 kg in the storage compartment under the cargo floor panel.◀ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 163 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving tips This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Driving tips Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Vehicle features and options Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐ prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐ formance between brake discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐ riod. Breaking-in period General information Clutch Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ other (break-in time). The following instructions will help accomplish a long vehicle life and good efficiency. During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐ trol, refer to page 75. The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently. Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be ob‐ served if any of the components above-men‐ tioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life. Engine, transmission, and axle drive Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h. General driving notes ▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and 93 mph/150 km/h. Closing the trunk lid Drive with the trunk lid closed Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ stances. From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased. Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐ wise, in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐ fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ ter the vehicle interior.◀ If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Things to remember when driving ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. ▷ Drive moderately. Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system Driving tips mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assur‐ ance that the radiation generated during trans‐ mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐ cle interior.◀ Hydroplaning High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐ sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased risk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐ erty damage. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is a danger of getting burned.◀ Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀ On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle. Driving through water Observe water level and speed Diesel particulate filter The diesel particulate filter collects soot parti‐ cles and burns them periodically at high tem‐ peratures. During several minutes of cleaning the follow‐ ing may occur: ▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less smoothly. ▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐ ing from the exhaust until shortly after the engine is shut down. ▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐ sary to reach usual performance. Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ hicle It is not recommended to use mobile phones, such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior without a direct connection to an external aer‐ ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and Do not exceed the maximum water level and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the trans‐ mission may be damaged.◀ Drive though calm water only and only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ ard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations needed. Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐ fort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode. In certain braking situations, the perforated brake discs can cause functional problems. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 167 Driving tips Things to remember when driving However, this has no effect on the perform‐ ance and operational reliability of the brake. Objects within the range of movement of the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident. Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐ wise the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed. Brake disc corrosion Brake disc corrosion and contamination of the brake pads are favored by: ▷ Low mileage. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, e.g.◀ Corrosion will built up when the maximum pressure applied to the brake pads during braking is not reached - thus discs don't get cleaned. Driving in wet conditions Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐ sponse - generally that cannot be corrected. When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, press brake pedal ever so gently every few miles. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. Condensation under the parked vehicle Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops collecting under‐ neath the vehicle. The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it. These traces of water under the vehicle are normal. Hills Avoid stressing the brakes Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐ sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀ Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐ available with the engine stopped.◀ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Loading Driving tips Loading Vehicle features and options vehicle and unstable driving situations may result. This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Hints Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved ca‐ pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐ creases the rate at which damage develops in‐ side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs. No fluids in the cargo area Make sure that fluids do not leak into the cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ aged.◀ Heavy and hard objects Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐ erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐ pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers.◀ 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. Determining the load limit 1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐ hicle’s placard: ▷ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 169 Driving tips Loading Load Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the trunk The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported. Floor net Stowing cargo The floor net can also be used to secure cargo and store small parts. ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo. ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests. Hook the floor net into the fittings in the trunk floor. Securing cargo Securing cargo Stow and secure the cargo as described; otherwise it may present a danger to the occu‐ pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers.◀ ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ taining straps or draw straps. ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps. Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or draw straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Loading Driving tips Roof-mounted luggage rack ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the trunk lid. Note ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐ ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently. Roof racks are available as special accessories. Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack. Roof drip rail with flaps The anchorage points are located in the roof drip rail above the doors. Fold the cover outward. Loading Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof. Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐ fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐ sponse. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. ▷ The roof load should not extend past the loading area. ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom. ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with ratchet straps. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 171 Driving tips Saving fuel Saving fuel Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and thereby reduces the range. Tires General information Tires can affect fuel consumption in various ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐ sumption. General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ ferent factors. Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ erate driving style and regular maintenance, can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ ronmental impact. Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear. Remove unnecessary cargo Drive away immediately Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. Remove attached parts following use Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. This is the quickest way of warming the cold engine up to operating temperature. Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Saving fuel Avoid high engine speeds As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear. Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐ ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐ gine speeds. When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐ stant speed. If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of the vehicle, refer to page 84. Driving tips road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors. Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and reduce the range, especially in city and stopand-go traffic. Reel off these functions if they are not needed. The ECO PRO driving program supports the energy conserving use of comfort features. These functions are automatically deactivated partially or completely. Use coasting When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. Have maintenance carried out For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐ erator and let the vehicle roll. Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life. The maintenance should be carried out by your service center. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. Auto Start/Stop function The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop. If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con‐ stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ onds of switching off the engine. In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ mined by other factors, such as driving style, Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer to page 210. ECO PRO The concept ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐ gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐ mate control output, are adjusted. Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐ matically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐ tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐ duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged. In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐ sumption driving style. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 173 Driving tips Saving fuel The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range. ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning": The output is reduced once the set ECO PRO speed is reached. Overview Coasting The system includes the following EfficientDynamics functions and displays: ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 174. ▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to page 175 ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 174. ▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to page 176. ▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to page 177. Activate ECO PRO Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster. Configuring ECO PRO Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" 3. Configure the program. Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐ ing the engine and Coasting, refer to page 176, with the engine idling. This function is only available in ECO PRO mode. ECO PRO climate control "ECO PRO climate control" Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient. By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption can be economized. The mirror heating is made available when out‐ side temperatures are very cold. ECO PRO potential Shows potential savings with the current set‐ tings in percentages. Display in the instrument cluster ECO PRO bonus range An adjusted driving style helps you extend your driving range. Via the iDrive 1. "Settings" This may be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster. 2. "ECO PRO mode" Or The bonus range is shown in the range display. 1. "Settings" 2. "Driving mode" 3. "Configure ECO PRO" The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled. Configure the program. ECO PRO Tip ▷ "Tip at:": Adjust the ECO PRO speed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Saving fuel Driving tips Efficiency display ECO PRO tip, driving tip Display in the instrument cluster The arrow indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance. Note The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated. Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips: Display in the instrument cluster with extended range 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "ECO PRO Info" ECO PRO tip, symbols An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed. Symbol Measure A mark in the efficiency display informs about the current driving style. Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐ ergy recovered by coasting or when braking. Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐ celerating. Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the bar's color: ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the blue range. ▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by backing off the accelerator pedal. For efficient driving back off the ac‐ celerator or delay accelerating to al‐ low time to assess road conditions. Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed. Steptronic transmission: shift from M/S to D. Steptronic transmission/manual transmission: follow shifting instruc‐ tions. Manual transmission: engage neu‐ tral for engine stop. The display switches to blue as soon as all conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving are met. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 175 Driving tips Saving fuel Indications on the Control Display Coasting EfficientDynamics The concept Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ ogy can be displayed while driving. The system helps to conserve fuel. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "EfficientDynamics" Displaying fuel consumption history The average fuel consumption can be dis‐ played within an adjustable time frame. Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐ lected time frame. Trip interruptions are represented below the bar on the time axis. "Consumption history" Adjusting fuel consumption history time frame Select the symbol. Resetting fuel consumption history 1. Open "Options". 2. "Reset consumption history" Displaying EfficientDynamics info The current efficiency can be displayed. "EfficientDynamics info" The following systems are displayed: ▷ Auto Start/Stop function. ▷ Energy recovery. ▷ Climate control output. ▷ Coasting. Display ECO PRO tips "ECO PRO Tips" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ sion when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged. This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ ing. As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐ tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again. Hints Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐ fer to page 173, driving mode. Coasting is automatically activated when ECO PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control. The function is available in a certain speed range. A proactively driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and sup‐ ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting. Safety mode The function is not available under one of the following conditions. ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐ sive current. ▷ Cruise control activated. Functional requirements In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Saving fuel prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are met: Driving tips Indications on the Control Display ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated. The Coasting driving condition is displayed in EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode is active. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ tion D. The distance traveled in the Coasting driving condition is indicated by a counter. ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature. The driving status Coast can be influenced with the shift paddles. Display Display in the instrument cluster Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: driving condition Coasting. Displaying EfficientDynamics info 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐ ometer approximately indicates idle speed. "EfficientDynamics info" Deactivating the system manually The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting. The function can be deactivated in the Config‐ ure ECO PRO, refer to page 174, menu, e.g., to use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐ eling downhill. Display in the instrument cluster with extended range Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. The mark in the efficiency dis‐ play below the tachometer is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tachometer approximately indicates idle speed. The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting. ECO PRO driving style analysis The concept In this situation the system helps develop an especially efficient driving style and to con‐ serve fuel. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display. Using this indication, the individual driving style can be oriented toward conserving fuel. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 177 Driving tips Saving fuel The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated. The range of the vehicle can be extended by an efficient driving style. Tips about the energy saving driving style, Conserving fuel, refer to page 172. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display. Functional requirement The function is only available in ECO PRO mode. Calling up ECO PRO driving style analysis 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. Select the symbol. Display on the Control Display The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐ ysis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup table. The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐ ing style. The more efficient the driving style, the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐ row 1. The table of values contains stars. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐ cluded in the table and the faster the bonus range increases, arrow 2. If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐ cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of stars is displayed. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO PRO tips are displayed during driving. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Saving fuel Driving tips I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 179 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Mobility In order to always ensure your mobility, you will find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside Assistance in the following. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Mobility Refueling Refueling Vehicle features and options 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise. This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. Hints Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to page 184, prior to refueling. Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur.◀ Diesel engines The filler neck is designed for refueling at die‐ sel fuel pumps. Closing Fuel lid 2. Close the fuel filler flap. Opening Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀ 1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. Do not pinch the retaining strap 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap. Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g. The release is located in the trunk. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Refueling Mobility 1. Open the cover on the right side trim. To do this, turn the lid. 2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap. Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐ ment and damaging the vehicle.◀ Handling fuels Observe safety regulations posted at the gas station.◀ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 183 Mobility Fuel Fuel Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards: US: ASTM 4806–xx CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx xx: comply with the current standard in each case. Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐ age of ethanol Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐ centage than recommended or one with other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise this could damage the engine and fuel supply system.◀ Fuel recommendation Note Recommended fuel grade General fuel quality Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐ gine problems, for instance poor engine startup behavior, poor handling and/or poor performance. Switch gas stations or use a brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀ Gasoline For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐ tent. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ taining metal must not be used. Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ out metallic additives. Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, as this can cause permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other compo‐ nents.◀ Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. BMW recommends AKI 91. Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89. Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐ mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐ formance.◀ If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life. Fuel quality The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ ronmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Fuel gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main‐ tenance.◀ Mobility Do not add any diesel additives Do not add additives, including gasoline; otherwise, engine damage may occur.◀ BMW Advanced Diesel Diesel The concept Low-Sulfur Diesel The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel with low sulfur content: Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx. xx: comply with the current standard in each case. Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel. The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must not exceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not use gasoline. If you do fill the tank with the wrong fuel, e.g., gasoline, do not start the engine as this may damage the engine.◀ After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv‐ ice center or Roadside Assistance. If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle. In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck, please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for instructions on how to add fuel. BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox‐ ides in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel exhaust fluid reducing agent into the exhaust system. A chemical reaction takes place inside the catalytic converter that minimizes nitrogen oxides. The vehicle has a tank that can be refilled. To be able to start the engine as usual, there must be an adequate reducing agent. Reducing agent is added by the service center. Warming up the system In order to warm the engine up to its operating temperature after a cold start, the Steptronic transmission may subsequently shift up to the next higher gear. Displays in the instrument cluster Reserve indication This display in the instrument cluster provides information about the distance that can still be driven with the current reserve level. For additional information regarding Roadside Assistance, refer to Owner's Manual for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment and Communication. Winter diesel To ensure that the diesel engine remains op‐ erational in the winter, use winter diesel. It is available at gas stations during winter months. The fuel filter heating system, included as a standard feature, prevents disruption of the fuel supply while driving. ▷ Lamp white: refill with re‐ duction agent at the next opportunity. ▷ Lamp yellow: not enough re‐ duction agent present. The remaining range is displayed in the instrument cluster. Im‐ mediately refill with reduc‐ tion agent, refer to page 186. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 185 Mobility Fuel Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum Diesel exhaust fluid at low temperatures ▷ The remaining range is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster: refill with reduction agent. The engine will con‐ tinue to run as long as it is not switched off and all other operating conditions are satisfied; sufficient fuel, e.g. Due to its physical properties, it is possible that the reducing agent may also need to be replenished between regular maintenance ap‐ pointments if it is exposed to temperatures un‐ der + 23 ℉/- 5 ℃. In this case, add reducing agent only immediately before driving off. The need to replenish it is indicated by the Re‐ serve display in the instrument cluster. Engine does not start Do not continue driving to the limit of the remaining travel distance. Otherwise, you will not be able to restart the engine after switch‐ ing it off. In certain cases, this could cause safety to be impaired.◀ After adding reducing agent, the Reserve Dis‐ play is displayed only until the fill level can be measured again. Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluid yourself in exceptional cases Filling with an incorrect fluid You can replenish reducing agent yourself in exceptional cases, e.g., to get to the service center. A Check Control message is displayed when an incorrect fluid is added. After adding the incorrect fluid, contact your service center. Avoid contact with Diesel exhaust fluid Do not come into contact with the reduc‐ ing agent. Otherwise, skin or eye irritations may result.◀ System defect A Check Control message is displayed when there is a system defect. Handling Diesel exhaust fluid Have the diesel exhaust fluid replenished When working with reducing agent in closed spaces, ensure good ventilation. When the bottle or container is opened, acrid smell‐ ing fumes may eslide.◀ The reducing agent is added by the service center within the context of regular mainte‐ nance. It may be necessary to have the fluid replen‐ ished several times under particular circum‐ stances, e.g., if the vehicle is driven in a partic‐ ularly sporty style or if it is driven at high altitudes. The reducing agent must be replenished as soon as the reserve display appears in the in‐ strument cluster to avoid not being able to re‐ start the engine. At temperatures below + 12 ℉/- 11 ℃, the fill‐ ing level cannot be measured in some cases. Keeping Diesel exhaust fluid out of reach of children Keep reducing agent out of reach of children.◀ Avoid contact with surfaces Avoid contact of reduction agent with surfaces of the vehicle; otherwise, damage could occur.◀ Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid ▷ Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. With this bottle and its special adapter, Diesel I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Fuel exhaust fluid can be replenished simply and safely. Mobility The vehicle tank will be filled. The tank is full when the fill level in the bot‐ tle no longer changes. It is not possible to overfill. ▷ Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32 Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at your service center. Refill quantity When the Reserve display starts, add at least 3 bottles of reducing agent. This corresponds to approx. 1.5 US gal/6 liters. Tank for reducing agent 5. Pull back the bottle, see arrow, and un‐ screw it. The tank for the reducing agent is located next to the fuel tank. 6. Replace the tank lid and turn it clockwise. Adding the reducing agent Add the reducing agent when the ignition is switched on. 1. Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 182. 7. Close the fuel filler flap. After adding Diesel exhaust fluid 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise and re‐ move. Note 3. Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it will go, see arrow. After filling with incorrect fluids, such as antifreeze for washer fluid, do not start the en‐ gine, otherwise there is risk of fire.◀ Incorrect fluids Contact your service center. Disposing of bottles You take your empty Diesel exhaust fluid bottles to your service center for disposal. 4. Press the bottle down, see arrow. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 187 Mobility Fuel Do not dispose of empty bottles with house‐ hold waste unless this is permitted by local regulations. Reserve indication The Reserve display will still ap‐ pear along with the remaining range after refilling. Engine can be started. After several minutes of driving, the Reserve indication goes out. Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum After filling, the indication -- is still displayed. Only after the display goes out can the engine -- be started. 1. Switch on the ignition. Display -- goes out after approx. 1 minute. 2. Engine can be started. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Wheels and tires Mobility Wheels and tires Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Tire inflation pressure Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. The displays of inflation devices may underread by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar. For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. Tire inflation pressure specifications Safety information ▷ Driving comfort. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 190, contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center. Checking the tire inflation pressure To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ sure influence the following: ▷ The service life of the tires. ▷ Road safety. Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ serve this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.◀ ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 190, and adjust as necessary. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐ flation pressure. Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐ tion pressure increases along with the tire's temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐ fications relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 189 Mobility Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 2.2 / 32 - - 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32 - - 2.4 / 35 2.5 / 36 - - 3.0 / 44 Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar. Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀ Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 320i, 320i xDrive Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 17 94 V M+S A/S RSC 2.2 / 32 Pressure specifications in bar/PSI 2.2 / 32 225/50 R 17 94 V M+S A/S RSC 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32 2.5 / 36 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 328i, 328d 2.2 / 32 - - 2.4 / 35 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Wheels and tires Mobility Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC 2.2 / 32 - 2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32 225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 2.2 / 32 - 2.2 / 32 - - 2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32 - - 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32 - - 2.4 / 35 2.5 / 36 - - 3.0 / 44 Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 2.2 / 32 - - 2.2 / 32 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC 2.2 / 32 - - 2.4 / 35 Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC 2.5 / 36 - - 3.0 / 44 Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC 4.2 / 60 Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC 328i xDrive, 328d xDrive Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 17 94 V M+S A/S RSC 2.2 / 32 Emergency wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 2.2 / 32 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 191 Mobility Wheels and tires 335i, 335i xDrive Tire size relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀ Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 320i, 320i xDrive Without high-speed tuning feature 2.2 / 32 Tire size 2.6 / 38 Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/50 R 17 94 V M+S A/S RSC 2.2 / 32 - - 2.4 / 35 225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC - - 2.6 / 38 T 135/80 R 17 102 M 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42 2.6 / 38 - - 3.0 / 44 Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC 2.2 / 32 - - 2.4 / 35 Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 2.4 / 35 - - 4.2 / 60 Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35 - - 2.6 / 38 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel: 2.7 / 39 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 2.4 / 35 Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC 2.2 / 32 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Wheels and tires Mobility Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Tire size Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC 2.5 / 36 - - 3.0 / 44 Front: 225/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 17 94 V M+S A/S RSC 3.0 / 44 Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60 Without high-speed tuning feature Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39 225/50 R 17 94 V M +S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC - 328i, 328i xDrive, 328d, 328d xDrive With high-speed tuning feature Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 2.9 /42 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 2.4 / 35 - - 2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38 - - 2.6 / 38 225/50 R 17 94 H M +S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V M +S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC 2.4 / 35 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 94 W RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC - Front: 225/45 R 18 2.5 / 36 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC 2.5 / 36 Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC Front: 225/40 R 19 2.5 / 36 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC - Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 2.4 / 35 225/45 R 18 95 V M +S XL RSC Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC 2.6 / 38 Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 193 Mobility Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC 2.6 / 38 - - 2.8 / 41 Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC 2.6 / 38 - - 2.8 / 41 2.7 / 39 - - 3.2 / 46 Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC 2.7 / 39 - - 3.2 / 46 Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h Emergency wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M 4.2 / 60 Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 2.9 /42 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 3.1 / 45 2.6 / 38 Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI 225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 2.7 / 39 - - 2.8 / 41 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M +S XL RSC 2.4 / 35 - - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Without high-speed tuning feature Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 17 94 H M 2.4 / 35 +S RSC Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC 4.2 / 60 335i, 335i xDrive With high-speed tuning feature Tire size Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 2.6 / 38 - - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Wheels and tires Mobility Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Tire size Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC 2.7 / 39 - - 3.0 / 44 Front: 225/35 R 20 2.9 /42 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC 2.9 /42 - Emergency wheel: - 3.4 / 49 Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 3.4 / 49 Speed up to a max. of T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60 Tire identification marks Tire size 245/45 R 18 96 Y With high-speed tuning feature Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 245: nominal width in mm 45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 18: rim diameter in inches 96: load rating, not for ZR tires Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 Speed letter Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h Front: 225/45 R 18 2.7 / 39 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC - Front: 225/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC - H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h 2.8 / 41 V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h 3.0 / 44 Tire Identification Number DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 0115: tire age I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 195 Mobility Wheels and tires Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Tire age DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the 1st week of 2015. Recommendation Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at least every 6 years. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature Uniform Tire Quality Grading The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐ quired by law. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Temperature grade for this tire Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ ing habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Run-flat tires, refer to page 199, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall. Traction M+S The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ RSC – Run-flat tires Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Wheels and tires Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. Mobility ioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ fects: ▷ Unusual vibrations while driving. Winter tires ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ dency to pull to the left or right. Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation. Minimum tread depth In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ duce your speed immediately and have the rims and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans‐ ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be‐ come life threatening for vehicle occupants and also other traffic.◀ Repair of tire damage Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ sult.◀ Changing wheels and tires Tire damage Mounting General information Information on mounting tires Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center. Hints If work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀ Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 197 Mobility Wheels and tires Wheel and tire combination New tires You can ask the service center about the right wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle. Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ figuration from a single manufacturer. Retreaded tires Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible. Approved wheels and tires You should only use wheels and tires that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐ facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g., despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to chassis contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot guarantee the operating safety of the vehicle.◀ The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires. Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de‐ sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.◀ Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads. Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐ vide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires. Maximum speed of winter tires Recommended tire brands If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then a respective symbol is displayed in your field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center. Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐ age and accidents can occur.◀ For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. Run-flat tires If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Wheels and tires Mobility Rotating wheels between axles Changing run-flat tires Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear. Your service center will be glad to advise you. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct if needed. For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you. Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐ cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles. Mobility System The concept Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed quickly to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Hints Storage Run-flat tires ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐ lity System found on the compressor and sealant container. ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ tive if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 in/4 mm or more. Label ▷ Contact the nearest service center if the tire cannot be made drivable. ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel. RSC label on the tire sidewall. The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐ cial rims. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire. ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportu‐ nity and have them replaced if needed. Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 199 Mobility Wheels and tires Storage Filling the tire with sealant The Mobility System is located under the cargo floor panel. 1. Shake the sealing container. Sealing container 2. Take the connection hose completely out of the compressor housing. Do not kink the hose. ▷ Sealing container, arrow 1. ▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. Observe use-by date on the sealant container. Compressor 3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐ tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it engages audibly. 1 On/off reel 2 Holder for bottle 3 Reduce inflation pressure 4 Inflation pressure dial 5 Compressor 6 Connector/cable for socket 7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom of the compressor I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Wheels and tires 4. Slide the sealing container upright into the holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ ing that it engages audibly. 5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire valve of the defective wheel. Mobility 7. With the ignition turned on or the engine running, reel on the compressor. Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐ nutes Do not allow the compressor to run longer than 10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat and may be damaged.◀ Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐ nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not reel off the compressor at this point. 6. With the compressor switched off, insert the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ hicle. If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not reached: 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel. 3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐ tribute the sealant in the tire. 4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your service center. Stowing the Mobility System 1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐ ant container from the wheel. 2. Remove the connection hose from the sealant container. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 201 Mobility Wheels and tires 3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐ nection hose in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area. 4. Insert the connector into a power socket inside the vehicle. 4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐ cle. Distributing the sealant Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐ sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h. 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to 2.5 bar. 1. Stop at a suitable location. ▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition turned on or the engine running, reel on the compressor. 2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire valve stem. ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐ ton on the compressor. To correct the tire inflation pressure Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor. Replace the defective tire and the sealant con‐ tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi‐ ble. 3. Attach the connection hose directly to the compressor. Snow chains Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved. Information about the approved snow chains are available from the service center. Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: ▷ 225/55 R 16. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Wheels and tires Mobility ▷ 225/50 R 17. ▷ 225/45 R 18. Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ tions. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐ ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if needed. Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 203 Mobility Engine compartment Engine compartment Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Important features in the engine compartment 1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 6 Oil filler neck 2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir 3 Washer fluid reservoir 4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 5 Engine compartment fuse box The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and diesel engines is located on the opposite side of the engine compartment. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Engine compartment Mobility Hood Indicator/warning lights Hints When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control message is displayed. Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. If work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀ Closing the hood Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving, pull over im‐ mediately and close it securely.◀ Danger of jamming Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Never reach into the engine compart‐ ment Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine compartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐ jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀ Fold down wiper arm Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms are against the windshield, or this may result in damage.◀ Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must audibly engage on both sides. Opening the hood 1. Pull lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 205 Mobility Engine oil Engine oil Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Electronic oil measurement Status display The concept The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐ play. If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed. Requirements General information A current measured value is available after ap‐ prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed. The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions. The engine oil consumption can increase in case of, for example: With frequent short-distance trips, regularly perform a detailed measurement. ▷ Sporty driving. ▷ Break-in the engine. Displaying the engine oil level ▷ Idling of the engine. On the Control Display: ▷ Usage of non-approved engine oil grades. 1. "Vehicle info" Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling. 2. "Vehicle status" Depending on its engine, the vehicle is equip‐ ped with electronic oil measurement or oil measuring is done with a dipstick. Engine oil level display messages 3. The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ uring principles: ▷ Status display ▷ Detailed measurement "Engine oil level" Different messages appear on the display de‐ pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention to these messages. If the engine oil level is too low, within the next 125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to page 207. Engine oil level too low Add engine oil immediately; otherwise, an insufficient amount of engine oil could re‐ sult in engine damage.◀ Take care not to add too much engine oil. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Engine oil Too much engine oil 3. Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to en‐ gine damage.◀ Mobility "Measure engine oil level" 4. "Start measurement" The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Time: approx. 1 minute. Detailed measurement The concept In the detailed measurement the engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Gasoline engine: If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed. Diesel engine: Adding engine oil General information Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐ cle before engine oil is added. Oil filler neck If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level or an overfilling is detected, a check con‐ trol message is displayed. During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ creased somewhat. General information A detailed measurement is only possible with certain engines. Requirements ▷ Vehicle is on level road. ▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed. ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelera‐ tor pedal not depressed. ▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ perature. Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. Adding engine oil Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km; otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀ Do not add too much engine oil When too much engine oil is added, im‐ mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀ Performing a detailed measurement In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level: 1. "Vehicle info" Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐ dren and observe the warnings on the contain‐ ers to prevent health risks.◀ 2. "Vehicle status" I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 207 Mobility Engine oil Engine oil types to add Diesel engine Hints API CJ-4. No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐ age.◀ Engine oil change: The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you let the service center change the motor oil. Viscosity grades for engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀ The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Suitable engine oil types You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐ ing oil rating standards: Gasoline engine BMW Longlife-01. BMW Longlife-01 FE. Diesel engine BMW Longlife-04. Further information regarding the oil specifica‐ tions and viscosities of engine oils can be in‐ quired with the service center. Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐ gine oil with the following oil rating can be added: Gasoline engine API SM or superior oil rating. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Coolant Mobility Coolant Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. The marks are on the side of the coolant reservoir. Symbol Meaning Maximum Minimum Adding 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it. Hints Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolant may cause burns.◀ Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.◀ Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about the suitable additives are available from the service center. 3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. 4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click. The arrows on the coolant reservoir and the lid must point towards one another. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ nated as soon as possible. Coolant level Disposal General information Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐ ant reservoir is located on the right side or the left side of the engine compartment. Comply with the relevant environmen‐ tal protection regulations when dispos‐ ing of coolant and coolant additives. Checking 1. Let the engine cool. 2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ tween the minimum and maximum marks. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 209 Mobility Maintenance Maintenance Vehicle features and options Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle. This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ mote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently. Storage periods BMW maintenance system The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ erational reliability of the vehicle. In some cases scopes and intervals may vary according to the country-specific version. Re‐ placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ rately. Additional information is available from the service center. Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if needed, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter. Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ nizes the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile. Detailed information on service requirements, refer to page 83, can be displayed on the Con‐ trol Display. Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els for additional information on service re‐ quirements. Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ ular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐ nance. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Maintenance Mobility Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis Note Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for onboard diagnostics may only be used by the service center or a work‐ shop that operates in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with correspondingly trained personnel and other authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result in operating problems for the vehicle.◀ Position There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle's emissions. Emissions ▷ The warning lamp lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis‐ firing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐ riod can seriously damage emission con‐ trol components, in particular the catalytic converter. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 211 Mobility Replacing components Replacing components Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to page 71, the wiper arms. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2. Onboard vehicle tool kit 4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the catch. 5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place. 6. Fold down the wipers. The onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the right side in the trunk in a storage compart‐ ment. Open the cover. Wiper blade replacement Note Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.◀ Folding down wipers before opening the hood Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms with the wiper blades are against the windshield to prevent damage.◀ Lamp and bulb replacement Hints Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ tion to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar those or if they have not been described here. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Replacing components Mobility Headlight glass You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center. Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool; otherwise, there is a danger of getting burned.◀ Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system, you should always reel off the lights affected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlights Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is a danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the conden‐ sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ light glass does not need to be changed. If the headlights do not dim despite driving with the light switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service center check this. Headlight setting The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. Have the head‐ lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐ ice after a replacement. Front lights, bulb replacement Halogen headlights Headlights Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.◀ Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 1 Parking lights Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. 2 High beams/headlight flasher 3 Low beams 4 Turn signal 5 Daytime running lights These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Accessing the turn signals and low beams Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀ Follow general instructions, refer to page 212. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 213 Mobility Replacing components Low beams 55-watt bulb, H7. 1. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove. In the wheel house, loosen the two brackets and remove the cover. Turn signal 21-watt bulb, PY21W 1. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove. 2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it from the holder and remove. 3. Pull the connector off the bulb. 4. Attach the connector to the new bulb. 2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal. 5. First insert the bulb at the top with the strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly, arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into place. 4. Attach the cover to the wheel house. 6. Close the headlight housing with the lid. Make sure that the lid engages. 7. Attach the cover to the wheel house. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Replacing components Accessing the daytime running lights, high beams/headlight flasher and parking lights Follow general instructions, refer to page 212. 1. Open the hood, refer to page 205. Mobility High beams/headlight flasher 55-watt bulb, H7. 1. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it from the holder and remove. 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove. 2. Pull the connector off the bulb. 3. Attach the connector to the new bulb. Parking lights 1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove. 4. First insert the bulb at the top with the strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly, arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into place. 2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 5. Close the headlight housing with the lid. Make sure that the lid engages. 6-watt bulb, H6W. 3. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed in reverse order of removal. Make sure that the bulb holder snaps into place. 4. Close the headlight housing with the lid. Make sure that the lid engages. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 215 Mobility Replacing components Daytime running lights Headlights 24-watt bulb, PW24W. 1. If necessary, remove the high beam bulb connector. 2. Remove the bulb holder. 1 Parking lights / daytime running lights 2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher 3 Turn signal Low beams and high beams are designed with xenon technology. 3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder. 4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal. During insertion, the bot‐ tom of the bulb holder must be facing downward. Make sure that the bulb holder snaps into place. The parking lights and daylight running lights are made using LED technology. 5. Attach the high beam bulb connector. Turn signal 6. Close the headlight housing with the lid. Make sure that the lid engages. Follow general instructions, refer to page 212. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Xenon headlights Xenon headlights Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lights on and off frequently shortens their life. If a bulb fails, reel on the front fog lights and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations. Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlights Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is a danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Replacing components Mobility Carefully pull back the wheel house panel, arrow 2. 21-watt bulb, PY21W 1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ ets and remove the cover. 2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1. Turn the bulb, arrow 2. 2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove. Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐ wise. Remove the bulb. 3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal. 3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector and screw on the wheel house panel. 5. Attach the cover to the wheel house. Turn signal in exterior mirror Front fog lights Follow general instructions, refer to page 212. Follow general instructions, refer to page 212. 35-watt bulb, H8. 1. Use the handle of the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1. The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 217 Mobility Replacing components Tail lights, bulb replacement Removing the exterior tail lamp 1. Open trunk lid. At a glance 1 Turn signal 2 Reversing lamp 3 Inside brake lamp 4 Tail lights 5 Outside brake lamp 2. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐ hicle tool kit to loosen the screw, arrow 1, and remove the cover, arrow 2. 3. Use the screwdriver handle to loosen the two nuts, arrows 1 and 2, and remove. The tail lamp is still attached to a rubber mount on the outside. Bulb replacement, exterior tail lights General information Follow general instructions, refer to page 212. Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL. Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W. The tail lights feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunc‐ tion. Use caution when replacing the bulb Use caution and proceed one step at a time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐ age to the tail lights or the vehicle.◀ 4. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp and carefully swing it back and out of the rub‐ ber mount, arrow 1. Use your free hand to hold it in place in order to prevent the tail lamp from coming loose suddenly. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Replacing components 5. Remove the connecting line from the clip on the bulb holder. Mobility component, arrow 2. Make sure that the tail lamp engages in the rubber mount. 6. Press and hold the catch at the top on the connector of the connecting line and re‐ move the connector from the bulb holder. Replacing the bulbs 1. Loosen the four fasteners, arrow 1, on the bulb holder and remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp, arrow 2. 4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts. 5. Insert and secure the cover. Make sure that the tubular seal is not pinched. Lights in the trunk lid General information Follow general instructions, refer to page 212. 2. Press the defective bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐ teners. Installing the tail lamp 1. Connect the connecting line to the tail lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip. 2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is not damaged. Reversing lights: 16-watt bulb, PW16W. Inner brake lights: 21-watt bulb, H21W Accessing the lights 1. If needed, remove warning triangle, refer to page 224, and bracket with the screw‐ driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, re‐ fer to page 212. 2. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐ hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re‐ move the screws on the trim. 3. Position and firmly press the outer part of the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐ row 1 and the inner part onto the centering 3. Carefully loosen the trim from the trunk lid, starting at the edge and working toward I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 219 Mobility Replacing components the area around the recessed grips. Make sure that the trim does not become stuck. Rear lamp, license plate lamp and central brake lamp 4. Carefully swing out the trim. Follow general instructions, refer to page 212. Replacing the reversing lamp and inner brake lamp These lights are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. 1. Loosen the two holders, arrow 1 and pull down on the lamp holder to remove, ar‐ row 2. Changing wheels Hints When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. Which is why no spare tire is available. The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center. 2. Unscrew the defective bulb of the revers‐ ing or brake lamp from its socket counter‐ clockwise. Jacking points for the vehicle jack 3. Insert the new bulb. Installing the bulb holder 1. Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar‐ row 2, into the connections, arrow 3. The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ cated at the positions shown. Vehicle battery Maintenance 2. Press on the bulb holder. Make sure that the two exterior holders latch into place. 3. Swing the trim back onto the trunk lid and secure. The battery is maintenance-free. The added amount of acid is sufficient for the service life of the battery. Further information about the battery can be obtained from your service center. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Replacing components Battery replacement Mobility Power failure Use approved vehicle batteries only Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ ble.◀ After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by the service center to ensure that all comfort features are fully available and that any Check Control mes‐ sages of these comfort features are no longer displayed. After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐ tings updated, e. g.: ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐ tions again. ▷ Time: update. ▷ Date: update. ▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize the system, refer to page 48. Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy‐ cling center. Charging the battery General information Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport. The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ lowing cases: Fuses ▷ When making frequent short-distance drives. Hints ▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐ riods, longer than a month. Hints Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an increased power consumption.◀ Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐ tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐ sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀ Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the trunk. Starting aid terminals In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 225, in the engine compartment with the engine off. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 221 Mobility Replacing components In the engine compartment In the trunk 1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen the three cover screws, arrow 1. Fold up the cargo floor panel. 2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2. 3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3. 4. Press the four fasteners and remove the cover. Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet. Attaching the covers 1. When attaching the cover, make sure that all four fasteners are engaged. 2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and then thread it between the bars. 3. Press down on the holder and tighten the three screws. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Breakdown assistance Mobility Breakdown assistance Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Hints Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐ able conditions.◀ Overview Hazard warning flashers SOS button in the roofliner Requirements ▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated. The button is located in the center console. ▷ The radio-ready state is switched on. ▷ The Assist system is functional. Intelligent Emergency Request 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. The concept 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green. In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ quest can be made through this system. ▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency Request was initiated. Initiating an Emergency Request If a cancel prompt appears on the display, the Emergency Request can be aborted. General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab‐ lished. ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been established. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 223 Mobility Breakdown assistance First aid kit When the emergency request is received at the BMW Response Center, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Note Some of the articles have a limited service life. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum‐ stances. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly. For this, data are transmitted to the BMW Response Center which serve to deter‐ mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g. the current position of the vehicle, if it can be established. Storage ▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW Response Center can no longer be heard via the speaker, you can nevertheless still be heard at the BMW Response Center. Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button. The first aid kit is located in the trunk in a stor‐ age compartment. Jump-starting General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐ bles with fully insulated clamp handles. Warning triangle Hints Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐ jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.◀ The warning triangle is located on the inside of the trunk lid. To remove, loosen the bracket. To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ dure. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Breakdown assistance Preparation Mobility Connecting the cables Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be‐ tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ wise, there is a danger of short circuits.◀ 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐ mation can be found on the battery. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ cle. 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles. Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.◀ 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid terminal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐ tance. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle. 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started. Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ creased idle speed. The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ tive terminal. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐ gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx. 10 minutes. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not success‐ ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐ other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ charged battery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐ verse order. Check the battery and recharge if needed. The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 225 Mobility Breakdown assistance Tow-starting and towing Tow truck Note With rear-wheel drive Tow-starting and towing For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position. Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. Towing Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions; otherwise, vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀ ▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn signals, and wipers may be unavailable. ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn. Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀ With xDrive ▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering. ▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐ quired. ▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehi‐ cle's response. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform. Do not tow with only the front or rear axle raised Do not tow the BMW with just the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the wheels could lock up and the transfer case could be damaged.◀ Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Breakdown assistance Steptronic transmission: transporting your vehicle Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown. Mobility Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.◀ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ pending on local regulations. Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ cur.◀ ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ dow. Tow bar Tow truck The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform. Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀ Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐ sitioning the vehicle. Towing other vehicles Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, al‐ ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Tow fitting The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ ried in the vehicle. The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. Hints Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐ sponse.◀ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 227 Mobility Breakdown assistance Manual transmission If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 224. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐ alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐ gine is cold. 1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations. The tow fitting is in the onboard vehicle tool kit located in a storage compartment on the right side in the trunk. Open the cover. Tow fitting, information on use ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. 2. Ignition, refer to page 64, on. 3. Engage third gear. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐ ately press on the clutch pedal again. ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. 5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. 6. Have the vehicle checked. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.◀ Screw thread for tow fitting Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out. Tow-starting Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission. Have the cause of the starting problems fixed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Care Mobility Care Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with high-pressure washers When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors and camera lenses on the outside of the vehicle for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀ Automatic car washes Hints Car washes ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. General information ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms. Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised. ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ age the vehicle. ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 70, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐ vation. Hints Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/60 ℃. If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐ tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐ sively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure washer.◀ ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐ tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 45. Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.◀ Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps: Manual transmission: 1. Drive into the car wash. 2. Shift to neutral. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 229 Mobility Care 3. Switch the engine off. ▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g., from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water. 4. Switch on the ignition. Steptronic transmission: ▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper. 1. Drive into the car wash. 2. Engage selector lever position N. After washing the vehicle 3. Switch the engine off. After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur. In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ played. Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; otherwise, selector lever position P is en‐ gaged and damages can result.◀ The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle. Completely remove all residues on the win‐ dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear. Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using care and cleaning products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved. To start the engine with manual transmission: 1. Press on the clutch pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Car care and cleaning products To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐ sion: Follow the instructions on the container. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐ cles. Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ ping on the brake turns the ignition off. Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health.◀ Selector lever position Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ cally: ▷ When the ignition is switched off. ▷ After approx. 15 minutes. Headlights ▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleansers. Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ quency and extent of your car care to these influences. Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Care Mobility mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐ tered or discolored. jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ turer's instructions. Leather care Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk. Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible. Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ ularly when they have been exposed to road salt. Rubber components Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or noises. Suitable care products are available from the service center. Fine wood parts Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously. Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth. Plastic components These include: ▷ Imitation leather surfaces. ▷ Roofliner. ▷ Lamp lenses. ▷ Instrument cluster cover. Damage from Velcro® fasteners Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀ ▷ Matt black spray-coated components. Caring for special components Do not soak the roofliner. ▷ Painted parts in the interior. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with water. No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐ vents Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 231 Mobility Care Displays/monitors grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.◀ Cleaning displays and screens Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety. Chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the webbing.◀ Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not use any chemical or household cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐ fected.◀ Keeping out moisture Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit; otherwise, electrical components can be damaged.◀ Avoid pressure Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry. Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.◀ Carpets and floor mats Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident. Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Long-term When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Additional information is available from the service center. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, e.g.◀ Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐ rior for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only. Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Care Mobility I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 233 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Reference This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Reference Technical data Technical data Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Note The technical data and specifications in this Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for example, due to the selected special equip‐ ment, country version or country-specific measurement method. Detailed values can be found in the approval documents, on informa‐ tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained from the service center. The information in the vehicle documents al‐ ways has priority. Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-specific measurement method. roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for example, due to the selected special equip‐ ment, tires, load and chassis version. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for example, a roof antenna, BMW 3 Series Limousine Width with mirrors inches/mm 80.0/2,031 Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.3/1,811 Height inches/mm 56.3–56.5/1,429– 1,434 Length inches/mm 182.2/4,627 Wheelbase inches/mm 110.6/2,810 Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.1–38.4/11.3–11.7 Weights The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐ cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐ lowing the slash apply to vehicles with Step‐ tronic transmission. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Technical data Reference 320i Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity lbs 4,355/4,400 kg 1,975/1,996 lbs 900 kg 408 lbs 2,005 kg 909 lbs 2,525 kg 1,145 lbs 165 kg 75 cu ft 17.0 Liters 480 lbs 4,420/4,455 kg 2,005/2,021 lbs 900 kg 408 lbs 2,040 kg 925 lbs 2,545 kg 1,154 lbs 165 kg 75 cu ft 17.0 Liters 480 328i Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 237 Reference Technical data 335i Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity lbs 4,565/4,585 kg 2,071/2,080 lbs 900 kg 408 lbs 2,160 kg 980 lbs 2,570 kg 1,166 lbs 165 kg 75 cu ft 17.0 Liters 480 lbs 4,542/4,585 kg 2,060/2,080 lbs 900 kg 408 lbs 2,140 kg 971 lbs 2,580 kg 1,170 lbs 165 kg 75 cu ft 17.0 Liters 480 320i xDrive Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Technical data Reference 328i xDrive Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity lbs 4,610 kg 2,091 lbs 900 kg 408 lbs 2,170 kg 984 lbs 2,580 kg 1,170 lbs 165 kg 75 cu ft 17.0 Liters 480 lbs 4,695/4,720 kg 2,130/2,141 lbs 900 kg 408 lbs 2,280 kg 1,034 lbs 2,580 kg 1,170 lbs 165 kg 75 cu ft 17.0 Liters 480 335i xDrive Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 239 Reference Technical data 328d Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity lbs 4,420 kg 2,005 lbs 860 kg 390 lbs 2,015 kg 914 lbs 2,535 kg 1,150 lbs 165 kg 75 cu ft 17.0 Liters 480 lbs 4,620 kg 2,096 lbs 860 kg 390 lbs 2,170 kg 984 lbs 2,580 kg 1,170 lbs 165 kg 75 cu ft 17.0 Liters 480 328d xDrive Approved gross vehicle weight Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Technical data Reference Capacities Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters Notes Gasoline: 15.8/60 Fuel quality, refer to page 184 Diesel: 15/57 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 241 Reference Everything from A to Z Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ tem 119 ACC, Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go 124 Acceleration Assistant, refer to Launch Control 75 Accessories and parts 7 Activated-charcoal filter 150 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion 116 Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, ACC 124 Adaptive brake lights, refer to Brake force display 118 Adaptive Light Control 93 Additives, oil 208 Adjustments, seats/head re‐ straints 50 After washing vehicle 230 Airbags 97 Airbags, indicator/warning light 98 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ culated-air mode 146, 149 Air, dehumidifying, refer to Cooling function 146, 149 Air distribution, manual 146, 149 Air flow, air conditioner 146 Air flow, automatic climate control 149 Air pressure, tires 189 Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ tion 150 Alarm system 44 Alarm, unintentional 45 All around the center con‐ sole 16 All around the roofliner 17 All around the steering wheel 14 All-season tires, refer to Win‐ ter tires 198 All-wheel-drive 120 Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 153 Alternative oil types 208 Ambient light 96 Antifreeze, washer fluid 71 Antilock Brake System, ABS 119 Anti-slip control, refer to DSC 119 Approved axle load 236 Approved engine oils, see Suitable engine oil types 208 Arrival time 88 Ash tray 156 Assistance when driving off 123 Assist system information, on Control Display 90 Attentiveness assistant 118 AUTO intensity 148 Automatic car wash 229 Automatic climate con‐ trol 145 Automatic climate control with enhanced features 147 Automatic Cruise Control with Stop & Go 124 Automatic Curb Monitor 58 Automatic deactivation, frontseat passenger airbags 99 Automatic headlight con‐ trol 93 Automatic locking 44 Automatic recirculated-air control 149 Automatic transmission, see Steptronic transmission 72 AUTO program, automatic cli‐ mate control 148 AUTO program, climate con‐ trol 146 AUTO program, intensity 148 Auto Start/Stop function 66 Average fuel consumption 87 Average speed 87 Axle loads, weights 236 B Backrest curvature, refer to Lumbar support 52 Backrest, width 52 Band-aids, refer to First aid kit 224 Bar for tow-starting/ towing 227 Battery replacement, vehicle battery 221 Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 35 Battery, vehicle 220 Belts, safety belts 53 Beverage holder, cu‐ pholder 162 Blinds, sun protection 47 BMW Advanced Diesel 185 BMW Assist, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communi‐ cation BMW Driver’s Guide App 6 BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys‐ tem 210 Bonus range, ECO PRO 174 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Everything from A to Z Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ pholders 162 Brake assistant 119 Brake discs, break-in 166 Brake force display 118 Brake lights, adaptive 118 Brake lights, brake force dis‐ play 118 Brake pads, break-in 166 Braking, hints 167 Breakdown assistance 223 Break-in 166 Brightness of Control Dis‐ play 90 Bulb replacement 212 Bulb replacement, front 213 Bulb replacement, halogen headlights 213 Bulb replacement, rear 218 Bulb replacement, xenon headlights 216 Bulbs and lights 212 Button, RES 127 Button, Start/Stop 64 Bypassing, refer to Jumpstarting 224 C California Proposition 65 Warning 7 Camera lenses, care 232 Camera, rearview cam‐ era 135 Camera, Side View 138 Camera, Top View 139 Can holder, refer to Cuphold‐ ers 162 Car battery 220 Car care products 230 Care, displays 232 Care, vehicle 230 Cargo 169 Cargo area, enlarging 158 Cargo area, storage compart‐ ments 162 Cargo, securing 170 Cargo straps, securing cargo 170 Car key, refer to Remote con‐ trol 34 Carpet, care 232 Car wash 229 Catalytic converter, refer to Hot exhaust system 167 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ ice 210 CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communi‐ cation Center armrest 161 Center console 16 Central locking system 39 Central screen, refer to Con‐ trol Display 18 Changes, technical, refer to Safety 7 Changing parts 212 Changing wheels 220 Changing wheels/tires 197 Chassis number, see vehicle identification number 9 Check Control 78 Checking the engine oil level electronically 206 Checking the oil level elec‐ tronically 206 Children, seating position 60 Children, transporting safely 60 Child restraint fixing sys‐ tem 60 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 62 Child restraint fixing systems, mounting 60 Child safety locks 63 Child seat, mounting 60 Child seats 60 Chrome parts, care 231 Cigarette lighter 156 Reference Cleaning displays 232 Climate control 145, 147 Clock 82 Closing/opening via door lock 39 Closing/opening with remote control 37 Clothes hooks 162 Coasting 176 Coasting with engine decou‐ pled, coasting 176 Coasting with idling en‐ gine 176 Cockpit 14 Cold starting, refer to Starting the engine 65 Combination reel, refer to Turn signals 69 Combination switch, refer to Wiper system 69 Comfort Access 41 COMFORT program, Dy‐ namic Driving Control 122 Compartments in the doors 161 Compass 154 Compressor 199 Computer, refer to On-board computer 86 Condensation on win‐ dows 150 Condensation under the vehi‐ cle 168 Condition Based Service CBS 210 Configuring driving pro‐ gram 123 Confirmation signal 44 ConnectedDrive, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communi‐ cation ConnectedDrive Services Connecting electrical devi‐ ces 156 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 243 Reference Everything from A to Z Continued driving with a flat tire 102, 105 Control Display 18 Control Display, settings 89 Controller 18, 19 Control systems, driving sta‐ bility 119 Convenient opening with the remote control 37 Coolant 209 Coolant level 209 Coolant temperature 82 Cooling function 146, 149 Cooling, maximum 148 Cooling system 209 Cornering light 93 Corrosion on brake discs 168 Cosmetic mirror 156 Courtesy lamps during un‐ locking 37 Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐ cle locked 38 Cruise control 130 Cruise control, active with Stop & Go 124 Cruising range 82 Cupholders 162 Current fuel consumption 83 D Damage, tires 197 Damping control, dy‐ namic 121 Data, technical 236 Date 82 Daytime running lights 93 Defrosting, refer to defrosting the windows 146 Defrosting, refer to Windows, defrosting 150 Defrosting the windows 146 Dehumidifying, air 146, 149 Deleting personal data 25 Deletion of personal data 25 Destination distance 87 Diesel exhaust fluid, at low temperatures 186 Diesel exhaust fluid, having refilled 186 Diesel exhaust fluid, on mini‐ mum 186 Diesel exhaust fluid, replen‐ ishing yourself 186 Diesel particulate filter 167 Digital clock 82 Digital compass 154 Dimensions 236 Dimmable exterior mirrors 58 Dimmable interior rearview mirror 59 Direction indicator, refer to Turn signals 69 Display, electronic, instru‐ ment cluster 77 Display in windshield 90 Display lighting, refer to In‐ strument lighting 95 Displays, cleaning 232 Disposal, coolant 209 Disposal, vehicle battery 221 Distance control, refer to PDC 132 Distance to destination 87 Divided screen view, split screen 23 Door lock 39 Door lock, refer to Remote control 34 Drive-off assistant 123 Drive-off assistant, refer to DSC 119 Driver assistance, refer to In‐ telligent Safety 106 Driving Assistant, refer to In‐ telligent Safety 106 Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol 121 Driving instructions, breakin 166 Driving mode 121 Driving notes, general 166 Driving stability control sys‐ tems 119 Driving style analysis 177 Driving tips 166 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 119 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol 120 Dynamic Damping Con‐ trol 121 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 119 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 120 E ECO PRO 173 ECO PRO, bonus range 174 ECO PRO display 173 ECO PRO driving mode 173 ECO PRO driving style analy‐ sis 177 ECO PRO mode 173 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐ struction 175 EfficientDynamics 176 Electronic displays, instru‐ ment cluster 77 Electronic oil measure‐ ment 206 Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to DSC 119 Emergency detection, remote control 35 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 182 Emergency Request 223 Emergency start function, en‐ gine start 35 Emergency unlocking, trans‐ mission lock 75 Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 41 Energy Control 83 Energy recovery 83 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Everything from A to Z Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 66 Engine, automatic switchoff 66 Engine compartment 204 Engine compartment, work‐ ing in 205 Engine coolant 209 Engine idling when driving, coasting 176 Engine oil 206 Engine oil, adding 207 Engine oil additives 208 Engine oil change 208 Engine oil filler neck 207 Engine oil temperature 81 Engine oil types, alterna‐ tive 208 Engine oil types, ap‐ proved 208 Engine start during malfunc‐ tion 35 Engine start, jump-start‐ ing 224 Engine start, refer to Starting the engine 65 Engine stop 66 Engine temperature 81 Entering a car wash 229 Equipment, interior 152 Error displays, see Check Control 78 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ gram, refer to DSC 119 Exchanging wheels/tires 197 Exhaust system 167 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 58 Exterior mirrors 57 External start 224 External temperature dis‐ play 82 External temperature warn‐ ing 82 Eyes for securing cargo 170 F Failure message, see Check Control 78 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ tional alarm 45 Fan, refer to Air flow 146, 149 Filler neck for engine oil 207 Fine wood, care 231 First aid kit 224 Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐ ting 227 Flat tire, changing wheels 220 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 104 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 100 Flat tire, warning lamp 101, 104 Flooding 167 Floor carpet, care 232 Floor mats, care 232 Fogged up windows 146 Fold down the rear seat back‐ rest, see Though-loading system 158 Fold-out position, wiper 71 Foot brake 167 Front airbags 97 Front-end collision warning with braking function 109 Front-end collision warning with City Braking func‐ tion 107 Front fog lights 95 Front fog lights, front, bulb re‐ placement 217 Front lights 213 front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deactivation 99 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator lamp 99 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 104 Fuel 184 Fuel consumption, current 83 Reference Fuel consumption, refer to Average fuel consump‐ tion 87 Fuel filler flap 182 Fuel gauge 81 Fuel lid 182 Fuel quality 184 Fuel recommendation 184 Fuel, tank capacity 241 Fuse 221 G Garage door opener, refer to Universal Integrated Remote Control 152 Gasoline 184 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 73 Gear shift indicator 84 General driving notes 166 Glare shield 156 Glass sunroof, powered 47 Glove compartment 160 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ proved 236 H Handbrake, refer to parking brake 68 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ nating code 153 Hazard warning flashers 223 Head airbags 97 Headlight control, auto‐ matic 93 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ ture 93 Headlight flasher 69 Headlight glass 213 Headlights 213 Headlights, care 230 Headlight washer system 69 Head restraints 50 Head restraints, front 54 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 245 Reference Everything from A to Z Head restraints, rear 55 Head-up Display 90 Head-up Display, care 232 Heavy cargo, stowing 170 Height, vehicle 236 High-beam Assistant 94 High beams 69 High beams/low beams, refer to High-beam Assistant 94 Hills 168 Hill start assistant, refer to Drive-off assistant 123 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 162 Homepage 6 Hood 205 Horn 14 Hotel function, trunk lid 41 Hot exhaust system 167 HUD Head-up Display 90 Hydroplaning 167 I Ice warning, see External temperature warning 82 Icy roads, see External tem‐ perature warning 82 Identification marks, tires 195 Identification number, see ve‐ hicle identification num‐ ber 9 iDrive 18 Ignition key, refer to Remote control 34 Ignition off 64 Ignition on 64 Indication of a flat tire 101, 104 Indicator and alarm lamps, see Check Control 78 Indicator lamp, see Check Control 78 Individual air distribu‐ tion 146, 149 Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 35 Inflation pressure, tires 189 Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 104 Info display, refer to OnBoard computer 86 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 101 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 104 Instrument cluster 77 Instrument cluster, electronic displays 77 Instrument lighting 95 Integrated key 34 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 30 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ quest 223 Intelligent Safety 106 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ gram 148 Interior equipment 152 Interior lights 95 Interior lights during unlock‐ ing 37 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 38 Interior motion sensor 45 Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ matic dimming feature 59 Interior rearview mirror, com‐ pass 154 Interior rearview mirror, man‐ ually dimmable 59 Internet page 6 Interval display, service re‐ quirements 83 Interval mode 70 J Jacking points for the vehicle jack 220 Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ sion 73 Jump-starting 224 K Key/remote control 34 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Access 41 Key Memory, refer to Per‐ sonal Profile 35 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ mission 73 Knee airbag 98 L Lamp replacement 212 Lamp replacement, front 213 Lamp replacement, rear 218 Lane departure warning 114 Lane margin, warning 114 Language on Control Dis‐ play 90 Lashing eyes, securing cargo 170 LATCH child restraint sys‐ tem 62 Launch Control 75 Leather, care 231 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ odes 213 Length, vehicle 236 Letters and numbers, enter‐ ing 25 Light alloy wheels, care 231 Light control 93 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 213 Lighter 156 Lighting 92 Lights 92 Lights and bulbs 212 Light switch 92 Load 170 Loading 169 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Everything from A to Z Lock, door 39 Locking/unlocking via door lock 39 Locking/unlocking with re‐ mote control 37 Locking, automatic 44 Locking, settings 43 Locking via trunk lid 40 Lock, power window 47 Locks, doors, and win‐ dows 63 Low beams 92 Low beams, automatic, refer to High-beam Assistant 94 Lower back support 52 Low-Sulfur Diesel 185 Luggage rack, see Roofmounted luggage rack 171 Lumbar support 52 M Maintenance 210 Maintenance require‐ ments 210 Maintenance, service require‐ ments 83 Maintenance system, BMW 210 Make-up mirror 156 Malfunction displays, see Check Control 78 Manual air distribu‐ tion 146, 149 Manual air flow 146, 149 Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 74 Manual operation, door lock 39 Manual operation, exterior mirrors 58 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 182 Manual operation, Park Dis‐ tance Control PDC 133 Manual operation, rearview camera 136 Manual operation, Side View 138 Manual operation, Top View 139 Manual transmission 72 Marking on approved tires 198 Marking, run-flat tires 199 Master key, refer to Remote control 34 Maximum cooling 148 Maximum speed, display 85 Maximum speed, winter tires 198 Measure, units of 90 Medical kit 224 Memory, seat, mirror 56 Menu, EfficientDynamics 176 Menu in instrument clus‐ ter 86 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ ing concept 20 Messages, see Check Con‐ trol 78 Microfilter 147, 150 Minimum tread, tires 197 Mirror 57 Mirror memory 56 Mobile communication devi‐ ces in the vehicle 167 Mobility System 199 Modifications, technical, refer to Safety 7 Moisture in headlight 213 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ play 18 Mounting of child restraint systems 60 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 14 Reference N Navigation, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment and Communication Neck restraints, front, refer to Head restraints 54 Neck restraints, rear, refer to Head restraints 55 Neutral cleaner, see wheel cleaner 231 New wheels and tires 197 Nylon rope for tow-starting/ towing 227 O OBD Onboard Diagnosis 211 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ agnosis 211 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 136 Octane rating, refer to Rec‐ ommended fuel grade 184 Odometer 82 Office, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Oil 206 Oil, adding 207 Oil additives 208 Oil change 208 Oil change interval, service requirements 83 Oil filler neck 207 Oil types, alternative 208 Oil types, approved 208 Old batteries, disposal 221 On-board computer 86 Onboard monitor, refer to Control Display 18 Onboard vehicle tool kit 212 Opening/closing via door lock 39 Opening and closing 34 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 247 Reference Everything from A to Z Opening and closing, without remote control 39 Opening and closing, with re‐ mote control 37 Opening the trunk lid with notouch activation 42 Operating concept, iDrive 18 Optional equipment, standard equipment 6 Outside air, refer to Auto‐ matic recirculated-air con‐ trol 149 Overheating of engine, refer to Coolant temperature 82 P Paint, vehicle 230 Parallel parking assistant 140 Park Distance Control PDC 132 Parked-car ventilation 151 Parked vehicle, condensa‐ tion 168 Parking aid, refer to PDC 132 Parking assistant 140 Parking brake 68 Parking lights 92 Particulate filter 167 Parts and accessories 7 Passenger side mirror, tilting downward 58 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ era 136 PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol 132 Pedestrian warning with city braking function 112 Personal Profile 35 Personal Profile, exporting profiles 36 Personal Profile, importing profiles 37 Pinch protection system, glass sunroof 48 Pinch protection system, win‐ dows 46 Plastic, care 231 Power failure 221 Power sunroof, glass 47 Power windows 46 Pressure, tire air pres‐ sure 189 Pressure warning FTM, tires 104 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ file 35 Programmable memory but‐ tons, iDrive 24 Protective function, glass sunroof 48 Protective function, win‐ dows 46 Push-and-turn switch, refer to Controller 18, 19 R Radiator fluid 209 Radio-operated key, refer to Remote control 34 Radio ready state 64 Radio, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Rain sensor 70 Rear lights 220 Rear socket 157 Rear turn signal, bulb replace‐ ment 218 Rearview camera 135 Rearview mirror 57 Rear window de‐ froster 146, 149 Recirculated-air filter 150 Recirculated-air mode 146, 149 Recommended fuel grade 184 Recommended tire brands 198 Refueling 182 Remaining range 82 Remote control/key 34 Remote control, malfunc‐ tion 38 Remote control, univer‐ sal 152 Replacement fuse 221 Replacing parts 212 Replacing wheels/tires 197 Reporting safety defects 9 RES button 127 RES button, see Active Cruise Control, ACC 124 RES button, see Cruise con‐ trol 130 Reserve warning, refer to Range 82 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 101 Retaining straps, securing cargo 170 Retreaded tires 198 Roadside parking lights 93 Roller sunblinds 47 RON recommended fuel grade 184 Roofliner 17 Roof load lidacity 236 Roof-mounted luggage rack 171 Rope for tow-starting/ towing 227 RSC Run Flat System Com‐ ponent, refer to Run-flat tires 199 Rubber components, care 231 Run-flat tires 199 S Safe braking 167 Safety 7 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 248 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Everything from A to Z Safety belt reminder for driv‐ er's seat and front passen‐ ger seat 54 Safety belts 53 Safety belts, care 232 Safety switch, windows 47 Safety systems, airbags 97 Saving fuel 172 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ play 18 Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐ hicle tool kit 212 Screw thread, see screw thread for tow fitting, screw thread for tow fitting 228 Sealant 199 Seat and mirror memory 56 Seat belts, refer to Safety belts 53 Seat heating, front 53 Seat heating, rear 53 Seating position for chil‐ dren 60 Seats 50 Selection list in instrument cluster 86 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 73 Sensors, care 232 Service and warranty 8 Service requirements, Condi‐ tion Based Service CBS 210 Service requirements, dis‐ play 83 Services, ConnectedDrive Servotronic 123 SET button, see Active Cruise Control, ACC 124 SET button, see Cruise con‐ trol 130 Settings, locking/unlock‐ ing 43 Settings on Control Dis‐ play 89 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ ror 56 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 74 Side airbags 97 Side View 137 Signaling, horn 14 Signals when unlocking 44 Sitting safely 50 Size 236 Slide/tilt glass roof 47 Smallest turning radius 236 Snow chains 202 Socket 156 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ nostics 211 Soot particulate filter 167 SOS button 223 Spare fuse 221 Specified engine oil types 208 Speed, average 87 Speed limit detection, onboard computer 88 Speed limiter, display 85 Speed Limit Information 85 Speed warning 88 Split screen 23 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic Driving Control 122 Sport displays, torque dis‐ play, performance dis‐ play 88 SPORT program, Dynamic Driving Control 122 Sport program, transmis‐ sion 74 Sport steering, variable 121 Stability control systems 119 Start/stop, automatic func‐ tion 66 Start/Stop button 64 Start function during malfunc‐ tion 35 Starting the engine 65 Reference Status control display, tires 101 Status information, iDrive 23 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Steering assistance 123 Steering wheel, adjusting 59 Steering wheel heating 59 Steptronic Sport transmis‐ sion, refer to Steptronic transmission 72 Steptronic transmission 72 Stopping the engine 66 Storage compartment in the rear 162 Storage compartments 160 Storage compartments, loca‐ tions 160 Storage, tires 199 Storing the vehicle 232 Suitable engine oils 208 Summer tires, tread 197 Sun visor 156 Supplementary text mes‐ sage 81 Surround View 135 Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ ing 121 Switch-on times, parked-car ventilation 151 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 Symbols 6 Symbols in the status field 23 T Tachometer 81 Tail lights 218 Technical changes, refer to Safety 7 Technical data 236 Telephone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment and Communication Temperature, automatic cli‐ mate control 146, 148 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 249 Reference Everything from A to Z Temperature display for ex‐ ternal temperature 82 Temperature, engine oil 81 Tempomat, refer to Active Cruise Control 124 Terminal, starting aid 225 Text message, supplemen‐ tary 81 Theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 44 Thigh support 52 Through-loading system 158 Tilt alarm sensor 45 Time of arrival 88 Tire damage 197 Tire identification marks 195 Tire inflation pressure 189 Tire inflation pressure moni‐ tor, refer to FTM 104 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 100 Tires, changing 197 Tire sealant 199 Tires, everything on wheels and tires 189 Tires, run-flat tires 199 Tire tread 197 Tone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Tool 212 Top View 138 Total vehicle weight 236 Touchpad 21 Tow fitting 227 Towing 226 Tow lug, see Tow fitting 227 Tow-starting 226 Tow truck 226 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor 100 Traction control 120 TRACTION, driving dynam‐ ics 120 Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 75 Transmission, manual trans‐ mission 72 Transmission, Steptronic transmission 72 Transporting children safely 60 Tread, tires 197 Trip computer 88 Triple turn signal activa‐ tion 69 Trip odometer 82 Truck for tow-starting/ towing 226 Trunk lid closing 40 Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ ing 41 Trunk lid, hotel function 41 Trunk lid opening 40 Trunk lid, opening with notouch activation 42 Trunk lid via remote con‐ trol 38 Turning circle 236 Turning circle lines, rearview camera 136 Turn signals, operation 69 U Unintentional alarm 45 Units of measure 90 Universal remote control 152 Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 73 Unlocking/locking via door lock 39 Unlocking/locking with re‐ mote control 37 Unlocking, settings 43 Updates made after the edito‐ rial deadline 7 Upholstery care 231 USB interface 157 V Vanity mirror 156 Variable sport steering 121 Vehicle battery 220 Vehicle battery, replac‐ ing 221 Vehicle, break-in 166 Vehicle care 230 Vehicle features and op‐ tions 6 Vehicle identification num‐ ber 9 Vehicle jack 220 Vehicle paint 230 Vehicle storage 232 Vehicle wash 229 Ventilation 150 Ventilation, refer to Parkedcar ventilation 151 VIN, see vehicle identification number 9 Voice activation system 27 W Warning and indicator lamps, see Check Control 78 Warning displays, see Check Control 78 Warning messages, see Check Control 78 Warning triangle 224 Warranty 7 Washer fluid 71 Washer nozzles, wind‐ shield 71 Washer system 69 Washing, vehicle 229 Water on roads 167 Weights 236 Welcome lamps during un‐ locking 37 Welcome lights 92 Wheel base, vehicle 236 Wheel cleaner 231 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 Everything from A to Z Reference Wheels, changing 197 Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 189 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 104 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 100 Width, vehicle 236 Window defroster, rear 146, 149 Windows, powered 46 Windshield washer fluid 71 Windshield washer noz‐ zles 71 Windshield washer sys‐ tem 69 Windshield wiper 69 Winter diesel 185 Winter storage, care 232 Winter tires, suitable tires 198 Winter tires, tread 197 Wiper 69 Wiper blades, replacing 212 Wiper fluid 71 Wiper, fold-out position 71 Wiper system 69 Wood, care 231 Word match concept, naviga‐ tion 25 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 212 X xDrive 120 Xenon headlights, bulb re‐ placement 216 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15 251 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: More about BMW The Ultimate Driving Machine® 01 40 2 960 440 ue bmwusa.com *BL296044000V* I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 440 - II/15